Design
ਗਾਈਡਾਂ: 1402 · ਭਾਗ: 16
ਪ੍ਰੋਜੈਕਟ, ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਅਤੇ ਟੈਂਪਲੇਟ45
- Control who sees a design in the design portalLearn how design visibility works for designers and admins and how access decides which designs appear in the design portal.
- Give edit access to a shared design via Home share and inviteSharing a design link alone does not grant editing, so invite the person by email from the Home tab to give them edit access.
- ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਵਿੱਚ SketchUp SKP ਫਾਈਲ ਇੰਪੋਰਟ ਕਰੋ3D ਇੰਪੋਰਟ ਨਾਲ SketchUp ਮਾਡਲ ਨੂੰ ਆਪਣੇ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਵਿੱਚ ਲਿਆਓ, ਜੇਕਰ SKP ਫਾਈਲ 100 MB ਤੋਂ ਘੱਟ ਹੈ।
- Publish your own designs as reusable templatesTurn your own models into templates that appear under 'All templates' for reuse, editing or showcasing.
- ਮਿਟਾਈ ਗਈ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਬਹਾਲ ਕਰੋਮਿਟਾਈਆਂ ਗਈਆਂ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨਾਂ ਪੱਕੇ ਤੌਰ 'ਤੇ ਨਹੀਂ ਗੁੰਮ ਹੁੰਦੀਆਂ, ਅਤੇ ਇੱਕ ਖਾਤਾ ਐਡਮਿਨ ਉਹਨਾਂ ਨੂੰ ਵਾਪਸ ਲਿਆ ਸਕਦਾ ਹੈ।
- Share a design with another userGive another user access to a design so they can continue working on it.
ਸਭ ਵੇਖੋ (45)
- ਟੈਂਪਲੇਟ, ਖਾਲੀ ਪੰਨੇ ਜਾਂ ਆਪਣੀ ਟੈਂਪਲੇਟ ਤੋਂ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਸ਼ੁਰੂ ਕਰੋInfurnia ਟੈਂਪਲੇਟ, ਖਾਲੀ ਪੰਨੇ ਜਾਂ ਦੁਹਰਾਉਣ ਵਾਲੇ ਪ੍ਰੋਜੈਕਟਾਂ ਲਈ ਸੰਭਾਲੀ ਆਪਣੀ ਕਸਟਮ ਟੈਂਪਲੇਟ ਤੋਂ ਨਵਾਂ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਸ਼ੁਰੂ ਕਰੋ।
- Create a new design projectCreate a project, name it, and start a new design from a template or a blank template to begin modelling.
- How designs auto-save and how to restore an earlier versionLearn how every meaningful action is saved automatically as a named version and how to go back to an earlier state from the version history.
- Start Design ਤੋਂ ਤਿਆਰ ਕੀਤਾ ਪ੍ਰੋਜੈਕਟ ਟੈਂਪਲੇਟ ਖੋਲ੍ਹੋStart Design ਤੁਹਾਨੂੰ ਪਹਿਲਾਂ ਤੋਂ ਬਣਾਏ ਪ੍ਰੋਜੈਕਟ ਟੈਂਪਲੇਟ ਦਿੰਦਾ ਹੈ, ਜਿਨ੍ਹਾਂ ਨੂੰ ਤੁਸੀਂ ਗਾਹਕ ਨੂੰ ਤੁਰੰਤ ਦਿਖਾਉਣ ਲਈ ਖੋਲ੍ਹ ਸਕਦੇ ਹੋ, ਜਾਂ ਨਵੇਂ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਲਈ ਖਾਲੀ ਟੈਂਪਲੇਟ ਤੋਂ ਸ਼ੁਰੂ ਕਰ ਸਕਦੇ ਹੋ।
- ਕਿਸੇ ਪ੍ਰੋਜੈਕਟ ਫੋਲਡਰ ਅੰਦਰ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨਾਂ ਦਾ ਨਾਮ ਬਦਲੋ, ਕਾਪੀ ਕਰੋ ਜਾਂ ਬਣਾਓਇਸ ਦੇ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨਾਂ ਦਾ ਪ੍ਰਬੰਧਨ ਕਰਨ ਲਈ ਇੱਕ ਪ੍ਰੋਜੈਕਟ ਖੋਲ੍ਹੋ, ਫਿਰ ਉਸੇ ਪ੍ਰੋਜੈਕਟ ਫੋਲਡਰ ਅੰਦਰ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਕਾਪੀ ਕਰੋ, ਨਾਮ ਬਦਲੋ ਜਾਂ ਜੋੜੋ।
- Use default templates for quick kitchen and bedroom conceptsPick a default template when starting a new design to show a client a rough idea of their kitchen or bedroom before the design is confirmed.
- ਬੈੱਡ, ਸਟੱਡੀ ਟੇਬਲ ਅਤੇ ਹੋਰ ਲਈ ਤਿਆਰ ਕੈਟਾਲਾਗ ਮੌਡਿਊਲ ਵਰਤੋਕੈਟਾਲਾਗ ਤੋਂ ਤਿਆਰ ਫਰਨੀਚਰ ਮੌਡਿਊਲ ਰੱਖੋ ਅਤੇ ਕੈਬਿਨੈੱਟ ਨਿਰਮਾਣ ਵਿਕਲਪਾਂ ਨਾਲ ਉਨ੍ਹਾਂ ਨੂੰ ਅਨੁਕੂਲਿਤ ਕਰੋ।
- Access the design workspace in Google Chrome on desktopUse Google Chrome on a desktop OS to access the design workspace.
- Copy design content between projectsCopy elements from one design and paste them into another so the same item is reproduced with pricing still fetched from the admin portal.
- Create a project with a mandatory name and start a new designCreate a new project by giving it a mandatory name, then start a new design from a default or blank template.
- Create a room from a template and set its name and typeStart a new design from a room template, then rename the room and set its type.
- Fix a design that opens in view mode and cannot be editedA design you can only view opens in view mode, where panels and components cannot be selected or edited, so you need edit access to inspect or change it.
- Mark a design as a room template for reuseMark a design as a template so you can reuse it for future designs.
- Organise designs as versions and client options in a projectCreate several designs inside one project so each one works as a version or a copy for your client options.
- ਐਡਮਿਨ ਪੋਰਟਲ ਤੋਂ ਮਿਟਾਇਆ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਬਹਾਲ ਕਰੋProject Hub > Design Hub > Deleted Designs ਹੇਠਾਂ ਮਿਟਾਇਆ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਲੱਭੋ ਅਤੇ ਇੱਕ ਕਲਿੱਕ ਵਿੱਚ ਇਸਨੂੰ ਇਸਦੇ ਪ੍ਰੋਜੈਕਟ ਵਿੱਚ ਬਹਾਲ ਕਰੋ।
- ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਪੋਰਟਲ ਵਿੱਚ ਪ੍ਰੋਜੈਕਟ ਖੋਜੋ ਅਤੇ ਮਿਟਾਏ ਗਏ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਲੱਭੋAll Projects ਨੂੰ ਪ੍ਰੋਜੈਕਟ, ਕਲਾਇੰਟ ਜਾਂ ਮੈਨੇਜਰ ਦੇ ਨਾਂ ਨਾਲ ਖੋਜੋ, ਅਤੇ Deleted Items ਹੇਠਾਂ ਮਿਟਾਏ ਗਏ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਅਤੇ ਪ੍ਰੋਜੈਕਟ ਲੱਭੋ।
- ਟੈਂਪਲੇਟ, ਕਸਟਮ ਟੈਂਪਲੇਟ ਜਾਂ ਖਾਲੀ ਕੈਨਵਸ ਤੋਂ ਪ੍ਰੋਜੈਕਟ ਸ਼ੁਰੂ ਕਰੋਪਹਿਲਾਂ ਤੋਂ ਪਰਿਭਾਸ਼ਿਤ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਕਿਸਮ, ਆਪਣੀ ਟੈਂਪਲੇਟ ਜਾਂ ਖਾਲੀ ਕੈਨਵਸ ਤੋਂ ਨਵਾਂ ਪ੍ਰੋਜੈਕਟ ਸ਼ੁਰੂ ਕਰੋ।
- Understand design portal access for production designersLearn how production designer access controls the production designs tab and limits designers to their own assigned projects.
- Access the design portal and find your projectsOpen the design portal in a browser at the design subdomain, sign in with your account ID and password, and find your projects from the portal home.
- Copy or import a construction, edit it, then publish and verify via Excel reportEdit a construction or import settings from styles and apply the changes.
- Create a project and start from a reusable templateCreate a new project in the design portal and start your design from a reusable template or a blank one.
- ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਪੋਰਟਲ ਤੋਂ ਨਾਮ ਅਤੇ ਕਲਾਇੰਟ ਵੇਰਵਿਆਂ ਨਾਲ ਪ੍ਰੋਜੈਕਟ ਬਣਾਓਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਪੋਰਟਲ ਤੋਂ ਪ੍ਰੋਜੈਕਟ ਦਾ ਨਾਮ ਅਤੇ ਕਲਾਇੰਟ ਵੇਰਵੇ ਭਰ ਕੇ ਪ੍ਰੋਜੈਕਟ ਬਣਾਓ, ਫਿਰ create project ਨਾਲ ਪੂਰਾ ਕਰੋ।
- Find your way around the design portal homeLearn what the design portal home sidebar and top-right links open, from projects and production designs to tutorials, support, admin and account settings.
- Get answers in the Design module without waiting for supportUse the help chat, help articles and tutorials in the Design module to answer how-to questions and keep working without waiting for a live support person.
- Link a designer to production in user managementLink the designer to production in user management so they can work on production.
- Manage multiple designs and deleted items in a projectKeep several designs in one project and find deleted projects and designs in a separate deleted section.
- ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਨੂੰ ਟੈਂਪਲੇਟ ਵਜੋਂ ਚਿੰਨ੍ਹਿਤ ਕਰੋਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਨੂੰ ਟੈਂਪਲੇਟ ਵਜੋਂ ਚਿੰਨ੍ਹਿਤ ਕਰੋ ਅਤੇ ਚੁਣੋ ਕਿ ਇਸ ਵਿੱਚੋਂ ਕਿਹੜਾ SKU ਡੇਟਾ, ਨਿਯਮ ਅਤੇ ਪਸੰਦਾਂ ਅਤੇ ਸੈਟਿੰਗਾਂ ਸੁਰੱਖਿਅਤ ਰੱਖਣੀਆਂ ਹਨ।
- Mark a design as a template and keep its SKU data, rules and settingsMark a design as a template and choose which of its SKU Data, Rules, Preferences and Settings carry over instead of the admin defaults.
- ਕਿਸੇ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਨੂੰ ਟੈਂਪਲੇਟ ਵਜੋਂ ਚਿੰਨ੍ਹਿਤ ਕਰੋ ਤਾਂ ਜੋ ਇਸਨੂੰ ਸਾਰੇ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨਰਾਂ ਨਾਲ ਸਾਂਝਾ ਕੀਤਾ ਜਾ ਸਕੇਕਿਸੇ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਨੂੰ ਟੈਂਪਲੇਟ ਵਜੋਂ ਚਿੰਨ੍ਹਿਤ ਕਰੋ ਤਾਂ ਜੋ ਇਹ 'Start new design' ਅਧੀਨ ਹਰ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨਰ ਲਈ ਉਪਲਬਧ ਹੋ ਜਾਵੇ।
- ਉੱਨਤ ਵਿਕਲਪ ਰਾਹੀਂ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਨੂੰ ਟੈਂਪਲੇਟ ਵਜੋਂ ਚਿੰਨ੍ਹਿਤ ਕਰੋਉੱਨਤ ਵਿਕਲਪ ਰਾਹੀਂ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਨੂੰ ਟੈਂਪਲੇਟ ਵਜੋਂ ਚਿੰਨ੍ਹਿਤ ਕਰਕੇ ਕੋਰ ਮਟੀਰੀਅਲ ਵਰਗੀਆਂ ਪਸੰਦਾਂ ਸੰਭਾਲੋ, ਅਤੇ ਟੈਂਪਲੇਟ ਵਰਜਨਾਂ ਨੂੰ ਵਧਣ ਤੋਂ ਰੋਕੋ।
- Open the design portal directly by typing its URLLoad the design portal in a new browser tab by typing its URL so you can reach new and recent projects.
- Read major product updates in What's NewOpen the What's New section to read articles about recent updates and features.
- Rename a design from the design viewChange the design name shown next to the design label in the design view.
- Mark as template ਨਾਲ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਨੂੰ ਦੁਬਾਰਾ ਵਰਤੋਂ ਯੋਗ ਟੈਂਪਲੇਟ ਵਜੋਂ ਸੇਵ ਕਰੋਪੂਰਾ ਹੋਇਆ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਦੁਬਾਰਾ ਵਰਤੋਂ ਯੋਗ ਟੈਂਪਲੇਟ ਵਜੋਂ ਸੇਵ ਕਰੋ ਤਾਂ ਜੋ ਨਵੇਂ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਬਣਾਉਂਦੇ ਸਮੇਂ ਉਹੀ ਲੇਆਉਟ ਅਤੇ ਪੇਸ਼ਕਾਰੀ ਫਾਰਮੈਟ ਦੁਬਾਰਾ ਵਰਤਿਆ ਜਾ ਸਕੇ।
- ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਸਾਂਝਾ ਕਰੋ ਅਤੇ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨਰਾਂ ਨੂੰ ਸੱਦਾ ਦਿਓਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਸਾਂਝਾਕਰਨ ਚਾਲੂ ਕਰਨ, ਕਿਸ ਕੋਲ ਪਹੁੰਚ ਹੈ ਦੇਖਣ, ਈਮੇਲ ਰਾਹੀਂ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨਰ ਨੂੰ ਸੱਦਾ ਦੇਣ, ਅਤੇ Version History ਤੋਂ ਬ੍ਰਾਂਚਾਂ ਅਤੇ ਵਰਜ਼ਨਾਂ ਦਾ ਪ੍ਰਬੰਧ ਕਰਨ ਲਈ Home ਤੋਂ Share Design ਖੋਲ੍ਹੋ।
- Home ਟੈਬ, Share, Invite ਰਾਹੀਂ ਪ੍ਰੋਜੈਕਟ ਸਾਂਝਾ ਕਰੋਕਿਸੇ ਹੋਰ ਉਪਭੋਗਤਾ ਨੂੰ ਉਸਦੀ ਈਮੇਲ ਆਈਡੀ ਨਾਲ ਸੱਦਾ ਭੇਜ ਕੇ ਪ੍ਰੋਜੈਕਟ ਤੱਕ ਪਹੁੰਚ ਦਿਓ।
- Start every new project from a blank projectBegin each new project from a blank project that loads into an empty page, then draft the floor plan from there.
- ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨਿੰਗ ਵੱਲ ਵਾਪਸ ਜਾਣ ਲਈ ਐਪ ਦੇ ਅੰਦਰਲੇ ਬੈਕ ਬਟਨ ਦੀ ਵਰਤੋਂ ਕਰੋਇੰਟਰਫ਼ੇਸ ਵਿੱਚ ਮੌਜੂਦ ਐਪਲੀਕੇਸ਼ਨ ਦੇ ਆਪਣੇ ਬੈਕ ਕੰਟਰੋਲ ਦੀ ਵਰਤੋਂ ਕਰਕੇ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨਿੰਗ ਵੱਲ ਵਾਪਸ ਜਾਓ।
- ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਖੋਲ੍ਹਣ 'ਤੇ 'Added missing components' ਨਾਮ ਦਾ ਵਰਜਨ ਕਿਉਂ ਦਿਖਾਈ ਦਿੰਦਾ ਹੈਜਾਣੋ ਕਿ ਸਿਰਫ਼ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਖੋਲ੍ਹਣ ਨਾਲ 'Added missing components' ਨਾਮ ਦਾ ਵਰਜਨ ਕਿਉਂ ਬਣ ਸਕਦਾ ਹੈ।
ਕੰਧਾਂ, ਕਮਰੇ ਅਤੇ ਆਰਕੀਟੈਕਚਰ193
- Add false ceiling as a child of the true ceilingAdd a true ceiling to the room first, then draw the false ceiling with the extrude rectangle tool and set its drop height and slab thickness.
- Add strip lights using rectangle, line or three-point arcAdd strip lights from Insert > Strip light and draw them as a rectangle, a line or a three-point arc, then set their intensity and colour.
- Change model, flip door sides/hinge, and set window sill heightPlace a door or window, then adjust its model, opening direction, hinge position and dimensions from its properties.
- AutoCAD ਵਿੱਚ ਡਰਾਫਟਿੰਗ ਕੀਤੇ ਬਿਨਾਂ ਐਪ ਵਿੱਚ ਫਾਲਸ ਸੀਲਿੰਗ ਬਣਾਓਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਟੂਲ ਵਿੱਚ ਸਿੱਧਾ ਅਨੁਕੂਲਿਤ ਫਾਲਸ ਸੀਲਿੰਗਾਂ ਨੂੰ ਮਾਡਲ ਕਰੋ ਅਤੇ ਆਪਣੇ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਵਿੱਚ ਸ਼ਾਮਲ ਕਰੋ।
- ਅਸਲੀ ਛੱਤ ਜੋੜੋ ਅਤੇ ਆਫਸੈੱਟ ਨਾਲ ਨਕਲੀ ਛੱਤ ਬਣਾਓceiling ਟੂਲ ਨਾਲ ਅਸਲੀ ਛੱਤ ਜੋੜੋ, ਫਿਰ ਆਇਤ ਖਿੱਚ ਕੇ ਜਾਂ ਕਿਨਾਰਿਆਂ ਵਾਲੀ ਛੱਤ ਲਈ ਕਾਪੀ ਨੂੰ ਆਫਸੈੱਟ ਕਰਕੇ ਨਕਲੀ ਛੱਤ ਬਣਾਓ।
- ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਨੂੰ ਕਮਰਿਆਂ, ਮੰਜ਼ਿਲਾਂ ਅਤੇ ਇਮਾਰਤਾਂ ਵਿੱਚ ਸੰਗਠਿਤ ਕਰੋਜਾਣੋ ਕਿ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਸਪੇਸ ਕਮਰਾ, ਮੰਜ਼ਿਲ ਅਤੇ ਇਮਾਰਤ ਪੱਧਰਾਂ ਵਿੱਚ ਕਿਵੇਂ ਸੰਗਠਿਤ ਹੈ, ਅਤੇ ਜਦੋਂ ਘਰ ਦੀਆਂ ਕਈ ਮੰਜ਼ਿਲਾਂ ਹੋਣ ਤਾਂ ਮੰਜ਼ਿਲਾਂ ਬਣਾਓ।
ਸਭ ਵੇਖੋ (193)
- Start a design from the room template and resize its wallsStart a new design from the room template, which comes with a pre-created room, then resize it by selecting walls and changing their dimensions.
- Architecture ਮੌਡਿਊਲ ਰਾਹੀਂ ਗ੍ਰੇਨਾਈਟ ਜਾਂ ਪੱਥਰ ਦੀ ਸਲੈਬ ਸ਼ਾਮਲ ਕਰੋArchitecture ਮੌਡਿਊਲ ਵਿੱਚ ਗ੍ਰੇਨਾਈਟ ਜਾਂ ਪੱਥਰ ਦੀ ਕਾਊਂਟਰਟਾਪ ਸਲੈਬ ਰੱਖੋ, ਫਿਰ ਇਸਦੀ ਉਚਾਈ ਸੈੱਟ ਕਰੋ, ਇਸਨੂੰ ਆਪਣੀ ਥਾਂ 'ਤੇ ਸਨੈਪ ਕਰੋ ਅਤੇ ਇਸਦੀ ਮੋਟਾਈ ਅਤੇ ਸਮੱਗਰੀ ਸੋਧੋ।
- ਵਾਲ ਸੈਕਸ਼ਨਾਂ ਅਤੇ ਖੋਜ ਰਾਹੀਂ ਦੀਵਾਰਾਂ ਨਾਲ ਸਕਰਟਿੰਗ ਜੋੜੋਆਪਣੀਆਂ ਅੰਦਰੂਨੀ ਦੀਵਾਰਾਂ ਲਈ ਵਾਲ ਸਕਰਟਿੰਗ ਚਾਲੂ ਕਰੋ ਅਤੇ ਲੋੜੀਂਦਾ ਸਕਰਟਿੰਗ ਬੇਸ ਖੋਜ ਕੇ ਲੱਭੋ।
- Add wall skirting to a wallSelect a wall and toggle on wall skirting to add skirting to it.
- ਕੰਧ ਭਾਗ ਦੇ ਵਿਸ਼ੇਸ਼ਤਾ ਪੈਨਲ ਤੋਂ ਵਾਲ ਸਕਰਟਿੰਗ ਲਾਗੂ ਕਰੋਕੰਧ ਭਾਗ ਦੇ ਵਿਸ਼ੇਸ਼ਤਾ ਪੈਨਲ ਵਿੱਚ Wall Skirting ਚਾਲੂ ਕਰੋ ਅਤੇ ਕੰਧ ਉੱਤੇ ਲਾਗੂ ਕਰਨ ਲਈ ਸਕਰਟਿੰਗ ਫਿਨਿਸ਼ ਚੁਣੋ।
- Change door/window model, width, thickness, flip side and hingeSelect a door or window and use the modify menu to change its model, width, thickness, opening side and hinge position.
- Create a room and copy its tiling, flooring and ceiling to other roomsAdd a room on the floor plan, finish it with tiles and ceiling finishes, then copy-paste its elements into other rooms to reuse the setup.
- slab ਟੂਲ ਦੀ ਵਰਤੋਂ ਕਰਕੇ ਵੱਖਰਾ ਰਸੋਈ ਪਲੇਟਫਾਰਮ ਬਣਾਓਇੱਕ ਕਸਟਮ ਰਸੋਈ ਪਲੇਟਫਾਰਮ ਬਣਾਓ ਜੋ ਮਿਆਰੀ ਕੈਬਿਨੇਟ ਲੜੀ ਤੋਂ ਵੱਖਰਾ ਹੋਵੇ।
- Create curved walls from the walls toolPick the curved wall option in the walls dropdown to draw a curved wall, then fine-tune its radius and other properties.
- Set wall height and slab thickness from ceiling elevationEstablish the correct wall height for a kitchen layout by reading the ceiling's elevation and setting the slab thickness from the same panel.
- Add a hob at countertop level and a chimney at furniture levelPlace a hob on the countertop and a chimney through the furniture level so both sit correctly in the design.
- Add cabinets by picking and dropping units from the catalogueOpen the catalogue, choose a base unit category and pick a cabinet of the required width, then drop it into the layout to build your design.
- ਫਲੋਰ ਪਲਾਨ ਤੋਂ ਛੱਤ ਸ਼ਾਮਲ ਕਰੋ ਅਤੇ ਐਲੀਵੇਸ਼ਨ ਨੂੰ ਕੰਧ ਦੀ ਉਚਾਈ ਨਾਲ ਮਿਲਾਓਫਲੋਰ ਪਲਾਨ ਵਿਊ ਵਿੱਚ ਛੱਤ ਵਿਕਲਪ ਚੁਣ ਕੇ ਅਤੇ ਕਮਰੇ ਦੇ ਅੰਦਰ ਲਾਗੂ ਕਰਕੇ ਛੱਤ ਸ਼ਾਮਲ ਕਰੋ।
- Add columns, beams and slabs from the architecture toolsPlace columns, beams and slabs on your floor plan and adjust their dimensions, end points, height and thickness.
- ਝੂਠੀ ਛੱਤ ਬਣਾਉਣ ਤੋਂ ਪਹਿਲਾਂ ਅਸਲੀ ਛੱਤ ਸ਼ਾਮਲ ਕਰੋਪਹਿਲਾਂ ਅਸਲੀ ਛੱਤ ਸ਼ਾਮਲ ਕਰੋ ਤਾਂ ਜੋ ਤੁਸੀਂ ਉਸ ਉੱਤੇ ਝੂਠੀ ਛੱਤ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਕਰ ਸਕੋ।
- ਦਰਵਾਜ਼ੇ ਅਤੇ ਖਿੜਕੀ ਦੀ ਜਗ੍ਹਾ ਨੂੰ ਮਾਪ 'ਤੇ ਕਲਿੱਕ ਕਰਕੇ ਵਿਵਸਥਿਤ ਕਰੋਦਰਵਾਜ਼ੇ ਜਾਂ ਖਿੜਕੀ ਦੀ ਜਗ੍ਹਾ ਦੇ ਮਾਪ 'ਤੇ ਕਲਿੱਕ ਕਰੋ ਅਤੇ ਇਸਨੂੰ ਹਿਲਾਉਣ ਲਈ ਨਵਾਂ ਮੁੱਲ ਟਾਈਪ ਕਰੋ, ਅਤੇ ਖਿੜਕੀ ਦੀ ਚੌੜਾਈ, ਉਚਾਈ, ਮੋਟਾਈ ਅਤੇ ਉਚਾਣ ਸੈੱਟ ਕਰੋ।
- Create a false ceiling from an RCC slabAdd a ceiling, then use its Create False Ceiling option to draft a false ceiling, since a slab drawn with the Slabs tool has no such option.
- Create a peripheral false ceiling with curved corners using filletDraw an inset rectangle on the ceiling, round its corners with the Fillet tool, then set the drop depth and material.
- Create a room by closing all walls into a loopClose all wall segments into a fully closed loop without overlapping boundary lines so the software generates the room automatically.
- ਸਲੈਬ ਟੂਲ ਦੀ ਵਰਤੋਂ ਕਰਕੇ ਅਰਧ-ਮਾਡਿਊਲਰ ਰਸੋਈ ਦੇ ਤੱਤ ਜਾਂ ਲਾਫਟ ਬਣਾਓਸਲੈਬ ਖੇਤਰ ਲਈ ਇੱਕ ਆਇਤ ਬਣਾਓ, ਫਿਰ ਸੈਟਿੰਗਾਂ ਵਿੱਚ ਇਸਦੀ ਫਰਸ਼ ਤੋਂ ਉਚਾਈ ਅਤੇ ਮੋਟਾਈ ਸੈੱਟ ਕਰੋ।
- ਘੁੰਮਾਵਦਾਰ ਕਟ ਨਹੀਂ ਸਮਰਥਿਤ ਹਨ; ਸਿਰਫ਼ ਸਿੱਧੇ ਕਟ ਹੀ ਮਸ਼ੀਨ ਨਾਲ ਕੀਤੇ ਜਾ ਸਕਦੇ ਹਨਜਾਣੋ ਕਿਹੜੇ ਕਟ ਮਸ਼ੀਨ ਨਾਲ ਕੀਤੇ ਜਾ ਸਕਦੇ ਹਨ, ਤਾਂ ਜੋ ਤੁਸੀਂ ਘੁੰਮਾਵਦਾਰ ਕਟਾਂ ਦੀ ਥਾਂ ਨਿਰਧਾਰਿਤ ਡੂੰਘਾਈ ਅਤੇ ਅੰਤਰਾਲ 'ਤੇ ਵਾਲ-ਪੈਨਲ ਖੋਭ ਬਣਾਉਣ ਦੀ ਯੋਜਨਾ ਬਣਾ ਸਕੋ।
- Find drawing tools and switch 2D/3D views in the navigation toolbarUse the navigation toolbar at the top of the design screen to reach all drawing and placement options and to switch between the 2D floor plan and 3D view.
- ਫਲੋਰ ਨੂੰ DWG ਵਜੋਂ ਕਿਵੇਂ ਐਕਸਪੋਰਟ ਕਰੀਏਫਾਈਲ ਕਿਸਮ ਅਤੇ AutoCAD ਰੀਲੀਜ਼ ਚੁਣ ਕੇ ਅਤੇ ਡਾਊਨਲੋਡ ਕਰਕੇ ਆਪਣੇ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਤੋਂ ਫਲੋਰ ਨੂੰ AutoCAD ਵਿੱਚ ਐਕਸਪੋਰਟ ਕਰੋ।
- Import a 3D model into the designBring an external 3D model into your design as a 3D model object, or draw solid curved geometry with the slab tool instead.
- ਟ੍ਰੇਸਿੰਗ ਬੈਕਗ੍ਰਾਊਂਡ ਰਾਹੀਂ AutoCAD ਫਲੋਰ ਪਲਾਨ ਇੰਪੋਰਟ ਕਰੋDWG/DXF ਫਲੋਰ ਪਲਾਨ ਨੂੰ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਵਿੱਚ ਟ੍ਰੇਸਿੰਗ ਬੈਕਗ੍ਰਾਊਂਡ ਵਜੋਂ ਲਿਆਓ ਤਾਂ ਜੋ ਤੁਸੀਂ CAD ਡਰਾਇੰਗ ਉੱਤੇ ਟ੍ਰੇਸ ਕਰ ਸਕੋ।
- ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਵਿੱਚ DWG CAD ਫਾਈਲਾਂ ਆਯਾਤ ਕਰੋDWG ਅੱਪਲੋਡ ਵਿਕਲਪ ਨਾਲ DWG CAD ਫਾਈਲ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਵਿੱਚ ਲਿਆਓ, ਤਾਂ ਜੋ ਤੁਸੀਂ ਮੌਜੂਦਾ CAD ਡਰਾਇੰਗ ਤੋਂ ਪਲਾਨ ਨੂੰ ਟ੍ਰੇਸ ਜਾਂ ਬਣਾ ਸਕੋ।
- Merge two separate walls by deleting one and trimming or extending the otherDelete one of the two walls and trim or extend the remaining wall so it spans the full run, applying a custom thickness to match an existing wall.
- Place cabinets in floor plan for correct positioningPlace cabinets in the floor plan so they snap to adjacent cabinets, and rotate them with the space bar.
- Set wall height and thickness before adding doors and windowsSet the wall height and thickness, then define doors and windows by their height, width, thickness and elevation.
- Understand what each design level shows and hidesLearn how World, Building, Floor and Room levels scope the canvas and what disappears when you switch.
- 2D ਵਿੱਚ ਫਲੋਰ ਪਲਾਨ ਅਤੇ ਕਮਰੇ ਦੇ ਪੱਧਰ 'ਤੇ 3D ਵਿੱਚ ਅੰਦਰੂਨੀ ਦ੍ਰਿਸ਼ ਵੇਖੋਫਲੋਰ ਪਲਾਨ ਵੇਖਣ ਲਈ 2D ਮੋਡ 'ਤੇ ਜਾਓ, ਅਤੇ ਰੋਕਣ ਵਾਲੀਆਂ ਕੰਧਾਂ ਲੁਕੀਆਂ ਅਤੇ ਛੱਤ ਦਿਖਾਈ ਦੇਣ ਨਾਲ ਅੰਦਰੂਨੀ ਦ੍ਰਿਸ਼ ਵੇਖਣ ਲਈ 3D ਵਿੱਚ ਕਮਰੇ ਦੇ ਪੱਧਰ ਦੀ ਵਰਤੋਂ ਕਰੋ।
- Add a ceiling and set up a false ceilingDraw a ceiling outline in the 2D sketcher, then adjust its elevation, thickness and material and add a false ceiling shape beneath it.
- Add a ceiling by picking inside the room and applyingCreate a ceiling from the floor plan and adjust its elevation and thickness on the ceiling itself.
- Add and edit beams with the Architecture Beam toolPlace beams one click at a time on the floor plan, then select a placed beam to edit its dimensions, rotation, shift, material or delete it.
- ਸਿਲ ਉਚਾਈ ਐਲੀਵੇਸ਼ਨ ਨਾਲ ਵਿੰਡੋਆਂ ਸ਼ਾਮਲ ਕਰੋ ਅਤੇ ਆਕਾਰ ਬਦਲੋਦਰਵਾਜ਼ਿਆਂ ਵਾਂਗ ਵਿੰਡੋਆਂ ਸ਼ਾਮਲ ਕਰੋ ਅਤੇ ਬਦਲੋ, ਸਿਲ ਉਚਾਈ ਐਲੀਵੇਸ਼ਨ ਸੈੱਟ ਕਰੋ ਅਤੇ ਡਰਾਇੰਗ ਉੱਤੇ ਸਿੱਧਾ ਦਿਖਾਈ ਦੇਣ ਵਾਲੇ ਮਾਪ ਉੱਤੇ ਕਲਿੱਕ ਕਰਕੇ ਵਿੰਡੋ ਦੇ ਆਕਾਰ ਬਦਲੋ।
- ਗਰਾਊਂਡ ਫਲੋਰ ਪਲਾਨ ਵਿਊ ਤੋਂ ਆਰਕੀਟੈਕਚਰਲ ਕਾਲਮ ਅਤੇ ਬੀਮ ਸ਼ਾਮਲ ਕਰੋਗਰਾਊਂਡ ਫਲੋਰ ਪਲਾਨ ਵਿਊ ਵਿੱਚ ਕੰਮ ਕਰਕੇ ਅਤੇ ਆਰਕੀਟੈਕਚਰ ਵਿਕਲਪਾਂ ਵਿੱਚੋਂ ਚੁਣ ਕੇ ਆਰਕੀਟੈਕਚਰਲ ਕਾਲਮ ਅਤੇ ਬੀਮ ਸ਼ਾਮਲ ਕਰੋ।
- Add electrical and plumbing markings directly in InferniaCreate electrical and plumbing markings inside Infernia instead of using separate software, placing points such as outlets and numbering points at the exact locations you specify.
- ਕਮਰੇ ਦੇ ਪੱਧਰ 'ਤੇ ਆਰਕੀਟੈਕਚਰ ਤੋਂ ਟਾਈਲਾਂ ਅਤੇ ਛੱਤ ਸ਼ਾਮਲ ਕਰੋਆਰਕੀਟੈਕਚਰ ਭਾਗ ਤੋਂ ਟਾਈਲਾਂ ਅਤੇ ਛੱਤ ਲਗਾ ਕੇ ਕਮਰਾ ਪੂਰਾ ਕਰੋ, ਫਿਰ ਛੱਤ ਨੂੰ ਆਪਣੀਆਂ ਕੰਧਾਂ ਨਾਲ ਮਿਲਾਓ।
- TI ਸ਼ਾਰਟਕੱਟ ਨਾਲ ਟਾਈਲਾਂ ਅਤੇ Architecture ਮੀਨੂ ਰਾਹੀਂ ਛੱਤਾਂ ਜੋੜੋਟਾਈਲਿੰਗ ਟੂਲ ਜਾਂ T I Enter ਸ਼ਾਰਟਕੱਟ ਨਾਲ ਕਮਰੇ ਵਿੱਚ ਟਾਈਲਾਂ ਜੋੜੋ, ਉਹਨਾਂ ਦੀ ਡੂੰਘਾਈ, ਪੈਟਰਨ, ਆਕਾਰ ਅਤੇ ਗਰਾਊਟ ਲਾਈਨ ਬਦਲੋ, ਫਿਰ Architecture ਮੀਨੂ ਤੋਂ ਛੱਤ ਲਗਾਓ।
- Build false ceilings from 2D rectangles and extrusionsCreate a false ceiling from 2D rectangles and extrusions, then add and adjust lighting types individually.
- ਇੱਕ ਵਿੰਡੋ ਨੂੰ ਕੇਂਦਰ ਵਿੱਚ ਰੱਖੋ ਅਤੇ ਕੰਧਾਂ ਦਾ ਸਹੀ ਫ਼ਾਸਲਾ ਸੈੱਟ ਕਰੋਵਿੰਡੋ ਨੂੰ ਕੰਧ ਦੇ ਵਿਚਕਾਰ ਰੱਖੋ ਅਤੇ ਇਸਨੂੰ ਕੰਧਾਂ ਤੋਂ ਸਹੀ ਦੂਰੀ ਦਿਓ।
- Choose floor or room level for interior workPick the floor level for a full floor plan or the room level for work inside a single room.
- Close walls into a room and edit wall propertiesClose walls into a room, name it, and adjust wall height and thickness from the properties panel.
- ਮੁੱਖ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਕਦਮ: ਕੰਧ, ਦਰਵਾਜ਼ਾ, ਖਿੜਕੀ, ਛੱਤ ਅਤੇ ਟਾਈਲਿੰਗਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਪੂਰਾ ਕਰਨ ਲਈ ਕੰਧਾਂ ਖਿੱਚੋ, ਦਰਵਾਜ਼ੇ ਸ਼ਾਮਲ ਕਰੋ, ਖਿੜਕੀਆਂ ਸ਼ਾਮਲ ਕਰੋ, ਛੱਤ ਸ਼ਾਮਲ ਕਰੋ ਅਤੇ ਟਾਈਲਿੰਗ ਸ਼ਾਮਲ ਕਰੋ।
- Create a false ceiling with a peripheral dropModel a false ceiling with a visible peripheral drop and a central island using layered rectangles.
- Create a room by adding walls, openings, ceiling and tiles in sequenceClose the walls fully so the ceiling tool detects the room area and measures the ceiling automatically, then view and edit the room in 3D.
- Create a slab in 3D from a 2D slab outlineDraw a slab outline in 2D, then set its elevation, thickness and tile finish in 3D.
- ਕੰਧ ਦੀ ਮੋਟਾਈ ਵਿੱਚੋਂ ਐਕਸਟ੍ਰੂਡ ਕਰਕੇ ਦਰਵਾਜ਼ੇ ਜਾਂ ਖਿੜਕੀ ਦੇ ਕਟਆਊਟ ਬਣਾਓਕੰਧ ਵਿੱਚ ਦਰਵਾਜ਼ੇ ਜਾਂ ਖਿੜਕੀ ਲਈ ਖੁੱਲ੍ਹ ਬਣਾਉਣ ਲਈ ਕਟ ਖੇਤਰ ਖਿੱਚੋ ਅਤੇ ਇਸਨੂੰ ਕੰਧ ਦੀ ਮੋਟਾਈ ਵਿੱਚੋਂ ਐਕਸਟ੍ਰੂਡ ਕਰੋ।
- Create false ceiling drops with extrude and offsetBuild peripheral and island false ceilings using the extrude and create-false-ceiling tools.
- Create island and peripheral false ceilings with offset and front shiftCreate island and peripheral false ceilings, and set thickness and front shift on a peripheral ceiling to leave a gap for strip lighting.
- Disable default railing on a staircase to remove railingsTurn off the default railing on a selected staircase so its railings are removed.
- ਫਲੋਰ ਲੈਵਲ 'ਤੇ ਕੰਧਾਂ ਅਤੇ ਫਲੋਰ ਪਲਾਨ ਬਣਾਓਜਾਣੋ ਕਿ ਕੰਧਾਂ ਅਤੇ ਫਲੋਰ ਪਲਾਨ ਕਿਹੜੇ ਲੈਵਲ 'ਤੇ ਬਣਾਉਣੇ ਲਾਜ਼ਮੀ ਹਨ, ਅਤੇ ਇੰਟੀਰੀਅਰ ਕੰਮ ਲਈ ਤੁਸੀਂ ਕਿਹੜੇ ਲੈਵਲਾਂ ਵਿਚਕਾਰ ਜਾਂਦੇ ਹੋ।
- Duplicate a placed wardrobe with Ctrl+C and Ctrl+VCopy a placed wardrobe unit and paste it into the remaining space, then drag units behind each other to adjust positioning.
- Edit a staircase and its steps and sectionsSelect a staircase to open its panel and adjust its drawing layer, dimensions, railings, steps and sections.
- Fix a floor slab that disappears when you hide the ceiling slabLearn why hiding the ceiling slab also hides the floor slab, since ceiling and floor slabs are both RCC slabs.
- Import 3D models and export GLTF with KHR extensionsBring .obj, .blend, .glb or .skp models into your design and export GLTF files with KHR extensions.
- ਕੈਟਾਲਾਗ ਜਾਂ ਪਲੇਸਮੈਂਟ ਰਾਹੀਂ ਛੱਤਾਂ ਅਤੇ ਪ੍ਰੌਪਸ ਲਈ 3D ਮਾਡਲ ਇੰਪੋਰਟ ਕਰੋਕਿਸੇ ਬਾਹਰੀ 3D ਮਾਡਲ ਨੂੰ ਅੱਪਲੋਡ ਕਰਕੇ ਅਤੇ ਕੈਟਾਲਾਗ ਵਿੱਚ ਪ੍ਰਕਾਸ਼ਿਤ ਕਰਕੇ ਜਾਂ ਸਿੱਧਾ ਰੱਖ ਕੇ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਵਿੱਚ ਲਿਆਓ।
- ਇਮਾਰਤਾਂ, ਮੰਜ਼ਿਲਾਂ, ਕਮਰਿਆਂ ਅਤੇ ਵਿਊਜ਼ ਵਿਚਕਾਰ ਜਾਓਜਿਓਮੈਟਰੀ ਸੋਧਣ ਦੀ ਬਜਾਏ ਪ੍ਰੋਜੈਕਟ ਅੰਦਰ ਸਥਾਨ ਬਦਲਣ ਲਈ ਨੈਵੀਗੇਸ਼ਨ ਟੂਲਬਾਰ ਵਰਤੋ।
- Place and move loft units via Furnish and the move toolPlace loft units from Kitchen Furniture, move them with the arrow options or the move tool, and add or resize box lofts as needed.
- Place beams and columns inside a room and edit their profileAdd a beam or column inside a room, change its cross-section and reposition it accurately.
- Place beams and columns, then adjust width, depth and heightPlace a beam or column in the model and adjust its width and depth from the panel.
- Place beams and columns with their toolsAdd beams and columns with their respective tools, setting a column's height to the wall height and a beam's height and elevation.
- Place ceiling lights and adjust point light and spotlight intensityPlace a ceiling light from the light options menu and adjust its point light and spotlight intensity after placement.
- Place windows by drag-and-click using the pink triangle centre pointPlace windows with the drag-and-click method, then adjust their materials and properties such as elevation.
- Recreate a wrong ceiling and add doors with opening directionDelete an incorrect ceiling, create a fresh one, and add doors to your plan.
- Resize a column using edit profile or the void column toolChange a column's size and height with edit profile, then place beams the same way.
- elevation ਫੀਲਡ ਨਾਲ ਖਿੜਕੀ ਦਾ sill ਲੈਵਲ ਸੈੱਟ ਕਰੋਸਾਈਟ 'ਤੇ ਮਾਪਿਆ ਗਿਆ sill ਲੈਵਲ elevation ਫੀਲਡ ਵਿੱਚ ਦਰਜ ਕਰੋ ਤਾਂ ਜੋ ਖਿੜਕੀ ਸਹੀ ਉਚਾਈ 'ਤੇ ਰਹੇ।
- ਫਾਲ ਸੀਲਿੰਗ ਦੀ ਉਚਾਈ ਨੂੰ ਕੰਧ ਦੀ ਉਚਾਈ ਵਿੱਚੋਂ ਸੀਲਿੰਗ ਦੀ ਮੋਟਾਈ ਘਟਾ ਕੇ ਸੈੱਟ ਕਰੋਫਾਲ ਸੀਲਿੰਗ ਦੀ ਸ਼ਕਲ ਅਤੇ ਮੋਟਾਈ ਨਿਰਧਾਰਿਤ ਕਰੋ, ਫਿਰ ਇਸਦੀ ਉਚਾਈ ਨੂੰ ਕੰਧ ਦੀ ਉਚਾਈ ਵਿੱਚੋਂ ਸੀਲਿੰਗ ਦੀ ਮੋਟਾਈ ਘਟਾ ਕੇ ਸੈੱਟ ਕਰੋ ਤਾਂ ਜੋ ਸੀਲਿੰਗ ਕੰਧ ਦੇ ਉੱਪਰਲੇ ਹਿੱਸੇ ਤੋਂ ਹੇਠਾਂ ਸਹੀ ਢੰਗ ਨਾਲ ਰਹੇ।
- Set the gap between true ceiling and false ceiling when extrudingUse extrude depth for the false ceiling thickness and front shift for how far it hangs below the true ceiling.
- Set up a floor's name, extent, tracing background and base in the floor menuOpen the Floor icon at the bottom left of the design portal to set the floor's name, extent, tracing background, floor base and export, and add Floor Outlines once the building has two or more floors.
- Show room dimensions and rename rooms on the planTurn on the Label / Show option in a room's properties so its dimensions appear on the plan, and rename rooms from the same area or by clicking inside them.
- Start a new design from a blank room or a preset roomStart a new design and choose either a blank room or one of the preset small rooms to begin from scratch.
- Switch between building, floor and room viewsSwitch between the building view and the floor view, and select a specific room to view.
- Understand the wall location line and how typed dimensions are measuredLearn how the location line places wall thickness and which face your typed dimensions are measured from.
- Use a DWG file for 2D plan tracingUse a DWG file's 2D plan, for example to trace walls.
- Work with building blocks, floor levels and rooms from the layoutCreate building blocks and floor levels in a project, then lay out a floor and define its rooms from that layout.
- Work with levels as real-world floorsLevels in Infurnia reflect real-world floors so you can model multi-floor projects.
- Add a building with New Blank Building or Copy BuildingOpen the buildings dropdown's '+ Add Building' panel to create a new blank building or copy an existing one, then manage buildings from the world menu.
- Add a column on the plan with Architecture > ColumnsPlace a column on the plan with one click and set its profile, dimensions, material and skirting in the Profile Column panel.
- Add a door to a wallPlace a door on a wall from the Architecture or Home tab and set it up in the Door panel.
- Add a furniture unit again after going backGo back, select a unit and add it again to place furniture in your design.
- Add a light from the furniture light sectionAdd a light from the furniture light section, then set its position and orientation.
- Add a new floor by copying or starting blankAdd another storey from the current floor level using the add-floor option.
- Add a roof and a tiling zone with the 2D sketcherDraw a roof outline and a tiling area in the 2D sketcher, then adjust the roof's settings in its panel.
- Add a slab and set its shape, elevation, thickness and materialDraw a slab outline in the 2D sketcher, apply it, then select the slab to adjust its shape, elevation, thickness or material.
- Add a window in the floor planPlace a window in a wall and set its size and elevation before you click.
- Add base, wall and tall units from the kitchen furniture catalogMark the room as a kitchen so the base, wall and tall units under kitchen furniture in Insert / Furnish are easier to access.
- Add columns and beams using the cuboidal column optionLearn the two column types available, normal profile column and cuboidal column, before placing columns and beams.
- Add kitchen cabinets from floor plan at room levelChoose a kitchen category and subcategory, pick the unit type, and place it in the room.
- Add kitchen units from the furnish library at the correct levelPlace kitchen units from the furnish library while working at the kitchen level so they land at the right height.
- Adjust each light's height individuallySet each light's Y-axis position on its own, since every item's X, Y and Z position differs and bulk adjustment is not possible.
- Apply a strip light to a panelPlace a yellow strip light in the 3D model.
- Apply flooring to a room and add an RCC slab using the slab toolChange the flooring pattern or material of a room afterwards.
- Avoid overlapping entities by adjusting dimensionsClick a placed element to see its dimensions and adjust them directly so it does not push into another element.
- Change a door model and position it by editing its dimensionSelect the door tool to see its height, width, thickness and model in the properties bar.
- Change a wall's length by editing its dimension valueSelect a wall and type a new dimension value to redraw it as a straight wall at the length you set.
- Change drawing units with UN and set room type for furnishingSwitch drawing units and decimals with UN, then rename each room and assign a room type so the right furnishing modules are offered.
- ਪ੍ਰੋਜੈਕਟ ਦੀਆਂ ਇਕਾਈਆਂ ਨੂੰ ਮਿਲੀਮੀਟਰ ਅਤੇ ਫੁੱਟ/ਇੰਚ ਵਿਚਕਾਰ ਬਦਲੋਮੌਜੂਦਾ ਪ੍ਰੋਜੈਕਟ ਨੂੰ ਦੁਬਾਰਾ ਬਣਾਏ ਬਿਨਾਂ ਇਸ ਦੀਆਂ ਕੰਮ ਕਰਨ ਵਾਲੀਆਂ ਇਕਾਈਆਂ ਬਦਲੋ।
- Change wall, door and window properties from the Modify menuAdjust wall dimensions and colours, door and window sizes, window height and elevation, and swap window models from the Modify menu.
- Click a placed door to generate its dimensionsClick a placed door to automatically generate its dimensions for editing.
- Combine multiple designs by copy-pasting all elements into one designCopy all elements from each design into a single design so the combined layout lives in one place.
- Copy a floor with its rooms and unitsDuplicate an existing floor so its rooms, names and units carry over to a new floor level.
- Create and edit rooms from enclosed wallsEnclose four walls to get an automatic floor and room text, then rename the room and change its text properties.
- ਆਫਸੈੱਟ ਕਾਪੀ ਜਾਂ ਮੂਵ ਵਰਤ ਕੇ ਪੈਰੀਫੈਰਲ ਬਨਾਮ ਸੈਂਟਰਲ ਫਾਲਸ ਸੀਲਿੰਗ ਬਣਾਓਛੱਤ ਉੱਤੇ ਇੱਕ ਫਾਲਸ ਸੀਲਿੰਗ ਆਇਤ ਬਣਾਓ, ਫਿਰ ਪੈਰੀਫੈਰਲ ਬਾਰਡਰ ਲਈ ਆਫਸੈੱਟ ਕਾਪੀ ਜਾਂ ਸੈਂਟਰਲ ਪੈਨਲ ਲਈ ਮੂਵ ਚੁਣੋ।
- Create staircases from the architecture staircase optionCreate a staircase on a floor level by choosing a stair type, setting its parameters and drafting it in plan.
- Customise room annotation text and show or hide room areaEdit the room annotation label from its settings, change its font size and font type, and show or hide elements such as the room area.
- Tab ਨਾਲ ਸਨੈਪ ਉਮੀਦਵਾਰ ਬਦਲੋ ਅਤੇ ਕੰਧਾਂ ਚੁਣੋਡਰਾਅ ਕਰਦੇ ਸਮੇਂ ਸਨੈਪ ਉਮੀਦਵਾਰ ਬਦਲਣ ਲਈ Tab ਅਤੇ Shift+Tab ਵਰਤੋ, ਅਤੇ ਚੁਣੀ ਹੋਈ ਕੰਧ ਉੱਤੇ Tab ਦਬਾ ਕੇ ਪੂਰੇ ਕਮਰੇ ਦੀ ਰੂਪਰੇਖਾ ਫੜੋ।
- Cycle wall location line, staircase side and window position with SpacebarPress the spacebar while drawing or moving walls, staircases and windows to cycle their location line, drawing side or position.
- ਕੰਧਾਂ ਨੂੰ ਪੂਰੇ ਟੁੱਟੇ-ਬਿਨਾਂ ਹਿੱਸਿਆਂ ਵਜੋਂ ਡਰਾਫਟ ਕਰੋ ਅਤੇ ਦਰਵਾਜ਼ੇ ਕੰਧਾਂ ਦੇ ਕੇਂਦਰਾਂ 'ਤੇ ਰੱਖੋਹਰ ਕੰਧ ਨੂੰ ਇੱਕ ਟੁੱਟੇ-ਬਿਨਾਂ ਹਿੱਸੇ ਵਜੋਂ ਖਿੱਚੋ ਅਤੇ ਕੰਧ ਦੇ ਕੇਂਦਰ 'ਤੇ ਸਨੈਪ ਕਰਕੇ ਉਸ 'ਤੇ ਦਰਵਾਜ਼ੇ ਰੱਖੋ।
- Draw a wall at an exact length and chain the next wallPoint in the wall's direction, type its length to open a length box, and press Enter so the wall is drawn at exactly that length and the next wall starts from its end.
- Draw a wall from start point to end pointClick the wall's start point, then set its end point by clicking the canvas or typing a length, and close a room by returning to the first start point.
- Draw ceilings, tiling and strip lights in the 2D sketcherOpen the 2D sketcher to draw ceilings, tiling and strip lights with Pick, line, arc, circle, rectangle and polygon tools, then apply the result.
- Draw electrical and plumbing layouts on the reflected ceiling planSet up line properties and multi-select elements so electrical and plumbing layouts, including 3D props such as fans, appear correctly on the reflected ceiling plan.
- Draw walls in the 2D floor plan with exact dimensionsDraw walls in the 2D floor plan by entering height and thickness, then clicking and typing exact lengths.
- Edit door dimensions by shift method or double-clicking the blue valueMove a door with its Shift row or double-click the blue dimension value to resize it.
- Edit in 2D and see changes in 3DMake changes in the 2D floor plan and watch them appear immediately in the 3D view, placing beams and columns in 2D first.
- Edit wall interiors at room levelWork on the interiors of the wall at room level, rotate the room and view the wall height.
- Enter and leave a room from the level selectorSelect a room to work inside it and switch back to floor level when you are done.
- Enter a room from the top navigation bar room selectorPick a room in the room selector next to the ground-level control to enter it and hide the walls and elements that are not part of it.
- Find furniture in a room's Furnish menu by room typeOpen a room's own view to see Furnish menu sections that match that room's type, such as Kitchen Furniture for a kitchen or Bedroom Furniture for a bedroom.
- Find items you cannot see by checking your levelCheck which level you are on, switch to the ground floor or the relevant floor, and remember that being inside a room hides elements outside it.
- Fix a room tag that does not appearClose any gap or collision between walls so the room is properly enclosed and its room tag appears.
- AI ਫਲੋਰਪਲਾਨ ਦੁਆਰਾ ਛੱਡੀਆਂ ਛੋਟੀਆਂ ਕੰਧਾਂ ਅਤੇ ਬਾਲਕੋਨੀਆਂ ਠੀਕ ਕਰੋਪਲਾਨ ਤਿਆਰ ਕਰਨ ਤੋਂ ਬਾਅਦ, ਉਹ ਛੋਟੀਆਂ ਕੰਧਾਂ ਅਤੇ ਬਾਲਕੋਨੀਆਂ ਸ਼ਾਮਲ ਕਰੋ ਜਾਂ ਠੀਕ ਕਰੋ ਜੋ AI ਨੇ ਨਹੀਂ ਲੱਭੀਆਂ।
- Format room labels: font size, font type, bold, italics and colourChange a room label's font size, font type, bold, italics and colour from the room properties, and show the room area when you need it.
- Furnish a kitchen with base units, wall units, lofts and countertopsDraft the floor plan with measurements, doors and windows, then place base units, add wall units and lofts, and attach countertops to the cabinets that need them.
- AI ਫਲੋਰਪਲਾਨ ਜਨਰੇਟਰ ਨਾਲ ਫਲੋਰ ਪਲਾਨ ਬਣਾਓਇੱਕ ਇਨਪੁੱਟ ਤੋਂ ਇੱਕ ਮਿੰਟ ਤੋਂ ਘੱਟ ਸਮੇਂ ਵਿੱਚ ਫਲੋਰ ਪਲਾਨ ਤਿਆਰ ਕਰੋ, ਫਿਰ ਬਹੁਤ ਛੋਟੀ ਲੰਬਾਈ ਵਾਲੀਆਂ ਕੰਧਾਂ ਅਤੇ ਬਾਲਕੋਨੀਆਂ ਨੂੰ ਹੱਥੀਂ ਜਾਂਚੋ ਅਤੇ ਠੀਕ ਕਰੋ।
- Get an overview of the Infurnia modulesSee how the design, render, production and pricing modules fit together, starting with the architecture tools for walls, doors, windows, ceiling, tiling, staircase, slab, column, railings, beam and roof.
- How ceilings and floors reference wallsLearn that a ceiling and floor in the design module can be created using a wall as a reference.
- How information modeling differs from AutoCAD and SketchUpLearn how every element placed in the design, including walls, carries associated information such as dimensions, properties and parameters.
- ਕਮਰੇ ਦੇ ਮਾਪ ਕਿਵੇਂ ਮਾਪੇ ਜਾਂਦੇ ਹਨਜਾਣੋ ਕਿ ਕਮਰੇ ਦੇ ਮਾਪ ਕੰਧ ਦੇ ਕਿਹੜੇ ਪਾਸੇ ਤੋਂ ਮਾਪੇ ਜਾਂਦੇ ਹਨ ਅਤੇ ਮਾਪ ਦਾ ਹਵਾਲਾ ਕਿਵੇਂ ਬਦਲਣਾ ਹੈ।
- How rooms are auto-numbered and renamed with labelsLearn how the software names each space Room 1, Room 2, Room 3 and so on as you add rooms to a design.
- Identify loose furniture as a 3D model with an O labelRecognise that loose furniture such as a bed is a non-modular 3D model that carries an O label rather than a cabinet label.
- Import a 2D CAD drawing or image to trace the floor planTrace an imported 2D CAD drawing or image into a floor plan, using snap settings for accuracy.
- Insert base and wall units via FR shortcut and insert menuPlace a base unit from the insert menu, then add wall units with the FR enter shortcut and align them to walls.
- ਛੱਤ ਦੀਆਂ ਲਾਈਟਾਂ ਪਾਓ ਅਤੇ ਤੀਬਰਤਾ, ਰੰਗ ਅਤੇ ਲਟਕਣ ਦੇ ਅਨੁਪਾਤ ਨੂੰ ਸਮਾਯੋਜਿਤ ਕਰੋਲਾਈਟ ਇੱਕ ਅਤੇ ਲਾਈਟ ਦੋ ਵਜੋਂ ਸਮੂਹਿਤ ਛੱਤ ਦੀਆਂ ਲਾਈਟਾਂ ਦੀ ਤੀਬਰਤਾ ਅਤੇ ਰੰਗ ਨੂੰ ਸਮਾਯੋਜਿਤ ਕਰੋ।
- 3D ਵਿਊ ਵਿੱਚ ਇੱਕ ਯੂਨਿਟ ਨੂੰ ਅਲੱਗ ਕਰੋ ਅਤੇ QC ਨੂੰ ਇੱਕ ਕਮਰੇ ਤੱਕ ਸੀਮਿਤ ਕਰੋਕੰਧਾਂ ਦੇ ਰੋਕੇ ਬਿਨਾਂ ਇੱਕ ਯੂਨਿਟ ਨੂੰ ਨੇੜਿਓਂ ਵੇਖੋ, ਫਿਰ ਉਸ ਨੂੰ ਆਪਣਾ ਵਰਕ ਸਕੋਪ ਦੇ ਕੇ ਸਿਰਫ਼ ਇੱਕ ਕਮਰੇ ਲਈ QC ਚਲਾਓ।
- ਘੱਟੋ-ਘੱਟ ਮਨਜ਼ੂਰਸ਼ੁਦਾ ਕੰਧ ਦੀ ਲੰਬਾਈ 100 mm ਹੈਜਦੋਂ ਤੁਸੀਂ wall tool ਨਾਲ ਕੰਧਾਂ ਖਿੱਚਦੇ ਹੋ, ਤਾਂ ਸਿਸਟਮ ਸਭ ਤੋਂ ਛੋਟੀ ਕੰਧ 100 mm ਦੀ ਸਵੀਕਾਰ ਕਰਦਾ ਹੈ।
- Model a cove ceiling by offsetting and extruding an inner rectangleDraw an inner rectangle on the ceiling, offset it inward by about 100 mm, then extrude the offset section with a depth of 100 and a front shift of zero.
- Move a door or window to an exact distance from the wall sidePlace an opening centered on a wall, then use its side dimensions to set the exact distance from either side.
- Move and rotate kitchen units in the floor planPosition kitchen units correctly on walls by moving them with the MV command or move tool and rotating them with the spacebar.
- Front Shift ਨਾਲ ਵਾਲ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਨੂੰ ਵਾਲ ਤੋਂ ਦੂਰ ਲਿਜਾਓਟਾਈਲਿੰਗ-ਕਟਿੰਗ ਸ਼ੇਪ ਉੱਤੇ Front Shift ਸੈੱਟ ਕਰੋ ਤਾਂ ਜੋ ਵਾਲ-ਮਾਊਂਟ ਕੀਤਾ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਵਾਲ ਦੀ ਸਤ੍ਹਾ ਤੋਂ ਤੁਹਾਡੇ ਪ੍ਰੋਜੈਕਟ ਯੂਨਿਟਾਂ ਵਿੱਚ ਕਿਸੇ ਮੁੱਲ ਜਿੰਨਾ ਅੱਗੇ ਚਲਾ ਜਾਵੇ।
- Move or resize a wall with the circular end handleClick the circular handle at one end of a wall and drag it to shorten, extend or reposition the wall.
- Name and type a room from its propertiesClick inside a closed room to open its properties, then rename it and pick a room type from the dropdown.
- Name a room and set its room typeClose a wall boundary into a room, then click its room label to give the room a name and a room type such as kitchen or bedroom.
- ਕਮਰਿਆਂ ਅਤੇ ਮੰਜ਼ਿਲਾਂ ਦੇ ਨਾਂ ਦਿਓ ਤਾਂ ਜੋ ਫੈਕਟਰੀ ਅਤੇ ਕੋਟੇਸ਼ਨ ਫਿਲਟਰ ਕੰਮ ਕਰਨਪ੍ਰੋਜੈਕਟ ਬਣਾਉਂਦੇ ਸਮੇਂ ਉਸ ਦੀਆਂ ਇਮਾਰਤਾਂ, ਮੰਜ਼ਿਲਾਂ ਅਤੇ ਕਮਰਿਆਂ ਨੂੰ ਪਰਿਭਾਸ਼ਿਤ ਕਰੋ ਤਾਂ ਜੋ ਫੈਕਟਰੀ ਅਤੇ ਕੋਟੇਸ਼ਨ ਫਿਲਟਰ ਕੰਮ ਕਰਨ।
- Place a double-swing wardrobe using the FR commandCreate a new design from a room template, then use the FR command to place a double-swing wardrobe.
- Beams ਟੂਲ ਨਾਲ ਬੀਮ ਰੱਖੋ ਅਤੇ ਸੰਪਾਦਿਤ ਕਰੋBeams ਟੂਲ (BM) ਨਾਲ ਇੱਕ ਕਲਿੱਕ ਵਿੱਚ ਬੀਮ ਰੱਖੋ, ਫਿਰ ਖੱਬੇ ਪੈਨਲ ਵਿੱਚ ਇਸਦਾ ਆਕਾਰ, ਸਥਿਤੀ ਅਤੇ ਸਮੱਗਰੀ ਬਦਲੋ।
- Place a window with configurable dimensionsPlace a window the same way you place a door, then set its dimensions to a standard size such as 800, 850 or 900.
- ਕਾਲਮਾਂ ਨੂੰ ਉਚਾਈ ਅਤੇ ਮਾਪਾਂ ਦੁਆਰਾ ਰੱਖੋਕਾਲਮ ਦੀ ਉਚਾਈ ਅਤੇ ਮਾਪ ਪਰਿਭਾਸ਼ਿਤ ਕਰੋ, ਫਿਰ ਇਸਨੂੰ ਕੰਧ ਦੇ ਅੰਦਰ ਜਾਂ ਕੋਨੇ 'ਤੇ ਰੱਖੋ।
- Place doors and windows from the floor planAdd doors and windows to built walls from the floor plan, then adjust their dimensions and parameters.
- Place openings away from walls, then set exact distance by typingMove an opening clear of the wall in 2D and then type its exact distance instead of dragging it.
- Plan furniture layout in 2D, not 3D, for easier snappingPlan furniture layout in the 2D space instead of the 3D space so snapping works and furniture stays where you put it.
- Raise an object above the floor in 3D room viewSwitch to the 3D room view, go inside the room, select the object and move it upward to raise it above the floor.
- Rename a room and change its type from room settingsOpen the room details from room settings to rename a room, change its type and adjust its label's font size, font type and font color.
- Rename a room and show or hide its area labelSet the area option to show or hide a room's area in the model space and choose the area format you prefer.
- Reposition the countertop and shape its front profileMove the countertop along the XYZ axes and shift and extend the front to indicate a profile.
- ਕਿਊਬ ਕਾਲਮ ਨਾਲ ਕਾਲਮ ਦਾ ਆਕਾਰ ਖੁੱਲ੍ਹ ਕੇ ਬਦਲੋਜਦੋਂ ਤੁਹਾਨੂੰ ਪ੍ਰੋਫਾਈਲ ਕਾਲਮ ਦਾ ਆਕਾਰ ਬਦਲਨਾ ਹੋਵੇ, ਤਾਂ ਉਸ ਦੀ ਥਾਂ ਕਿਊਬ ਕਾਲਮ ਲਗਾਓ, ਅਤੇ ਜੇ ਉਸ ਦੀ ਸ਼ਕਲ ਦੀ ਲੋੜ ਨਾ ਹੋਵੇ ਤਾਂ ਪ੍ਰੋਫਾਈਲ ਕਾਲਮ ਹਟਾ ਦਿਓ।
- Resize or remove a sink from the selection treeChange a sink's height, width and depth, or remove it entirely, using the furniture light unit in the selection tree.
- ਕਾਲਮ ਦਾ ਪ੍ਰੋਫਾਈਲ ਸੰਪਾਦਿਤ ਕਰਕੇ ਉਸਨੂੰ ਘੁਮਾਓਕਾਲਮ ਦਾ ਪ੍ਰੋਫਾਈਲ ਸੰਪਾਦਿਤ ਕਰਕੇ ਅਤੇ ਘੁਮਾਈ ਹੋਈ ਦਿਸ਼ਾ ਵਿੱਚ ਉਸਨੂੰ ਦੁਬਾਰਾ ਪਰਿਭਾਸ਼ਿਤ ਕਰਕੇ ਉਸਦੀ ਦਿਸ਼ਾ ਬਦਲੋ।
- Rotate elements and edit column profilesRotate elements with the spacebar and edit column profiles through the profile edit feature.
- Segregate open spaces into rooms with a room dividerUse a room divider to split an open-plan space into distinct functional rooms without adding physical walls.
- Set a room's name and type so the right furniture appearsName each room and give it a type so Insert > Furnish shows only the furniture and accessories that match it.
- Room Settings ਵਿੱਚ ਕਿਸੇ ਕਮਰੇ ਦੀ ਕਿਸਮ ਅਤੇ ਨਾਮ ਸੈੱਟ ਕਰੋਹਰੇਕ ਕਮਰੇ ਨੂੰ Room Settings > Type ਤੋਂ ਉਸਦੀ ਸਹੀ ਕਿਸਮ ਦਿਓ, ਇਹ ਜਾਣਦੇ ਹੋਏ ਕਿ ਨਵਾਂ ਕਮਰਾ 'Room <n>' ਵਜੋਂ Balcony ਕਿਸਮ ਨਾਲ ਸ਼ੁਰੂ ਹੁੰਦਾ ਹੈ ਜਦ ਤੱਕ ਤੁਸੀਂ ਇਸਨੂੰ ਬਦਲਦੇ ਨਹੀਂ।
- Set room dimensions from center or inner walls and pick room typeSwitch room dimensions to inner-wall measurements and choose a room type so Insert and Furnish only offers matching furniture and accessories.
- Set room inner dimensions and wall height before designingSet the left wall height and thickness and name the room so it is identifiable in the project before you start designing.
- ਸੁਝਾਵਾਂ ਵਿੱਚ ਰਸੋਈ ਦਾ ਫਰਨੀਚਰ ਪ੍ਰਾਪਤ ਕਰਨ ਲਈ ਕਮਰੇ ਦੀ ਕਿਸਮ ਰਸੋਈ ਸੈੱਟ ਕਰੋਰਸੋਈ ਯੂਨਿਟ ਰੱਖਦੇ ਸਮੇਂ ਕਮਰੇ ਦੀ ਕਿਸਮ ਰਸੋਈ ਸੈੱਟ ਕਰੋ ਤਾਂ ਜੋ ਸੁਝਾਵਾਂ ਵਿੱਚ ਰਸੋਈ ਦਾ ਫਰਨੀਚਰ ਅਤੇ ਸਹਾਇਕ ਸਮਾਨ ਦਿਖੇ।
- ਮੰਜ਼ਿਲ ਦਾ ਹੇਠਲਾ ਪੱਧਰ ਸੈੱਟ ਕਰੋਮੰਜ਼ਿਲ ਦੀ ਹੇਠਲੀ ਉਚਾਈ ਨੂੰ Floor left menu ਤੋਂ ਸੈੱਟ ਕਰੋ ਤਾਂ ਜੋ ਇਸ ਦਾ ਵਿਸਥਾਰ ਸਹੀ ਪੱਧਰ ਤੋਂ ਸ਼ੁਰੂ ਹੋਵੇ।
- ਫਰਸ਼ ਦੀ ਟਾਈਲ ਦੇ ਖਾਲੀ ਸਥਾਨ ਤੋਂ ਉੱਪਰ ਵਾਲ ਯੂਨਿਟ ਦੀ ਹੇਠਲੀ ਉਚਾਈ ਸੈੱਟ ਕਰੋਜਾਣੋ ਕਿ ਬੇਸ ਯੂਨਿਟ ਜ਼ੀਰੋ ਲੈਵਲ ਤੋਂ 12 mm ਉੱਪਰ ਕਿਉਂ ਹੁੰਦੇ ਹਨ, ਤਾਂ ਜੋ ਵਾਲ ਯੂਨਿਟ ਦੀ ਹੇਠਲੀ ਉਚਾਈ ਮਿਆਰੀ 1450 mm ਤੋਂ 12 mm ਉੱਪਰ ਸੈੱਟ ਹੋਵੇ।
- ਪ੍ਰੀਸੈਟਾਂ ਜਾਂ ਕਸਟਮ ਮੁੱਲ ਤੋਂ ਕੰਧ ਦੀ ਮੋਟਾਈ ਸੈੱਟ ਕਰੋਕੈਟਾਲਾਗ ਦੇ ਪ੍ਰੀਸੈਟ ਵਿਕਲਪਾਂ ਵਿੱਚੋਂ ਕੰਧ ਦੀ ਤਿਆਰ ਸਮੱਗਰੀ ਦੀ ਮੋਟਾਈ ਚੁਣੋ ਜਾਂ ਆਪਣਾ ਕਸਟਮ ਮੁੱਲ ਟਾਈਪ ਕਰੋ।
- Set wall unit height from floor via Y positionPlace a wall unit at a standard height by setting its Y-axis value to the unit's bottom height above finished floor level plus the tile offset.
- ਐਲੀਵੇਸ਼ਨ ਦ੍ਰਿਸ਼ ਵਿੱਚ ਸੀਡ੍ਹੀ ਦਿਖਾਓਡ੍ਰਾਅ ਟੂਲ ਨਾਲ ਹੱਥੋਂ ਖਿੱਚ ਕੇ ਐਲੀਵੇਸ਼ਨ ਵਿੱਚ ਸੀਡ੍ਹੀ ਦਰਸਾਓ।
- Show countertops and sinks in floor plans via custom plan cutting planeCreate a new custom plan and set the cutting plane height so countertops draw with continuous lines and sinks appear in the floor plan.
- ਐਲੀਮੈਂਟ ਰੱਖਦੇ ਸਮੇਂ ਵਾਲ ਦੇ ਕੇਂਦਰ ਸੂਚਕ ਨੂੰ ਪਛਾਣੋਜਦੋਂ ਕਰਸਰ ਕਿਸੇ ਵਾਲ ਦੇ ਬਿਲਕੁਲ ਕੇਂਦਰ ਵਿੱਚ ਪਹੁੰਚਦਾ ਹੈ ਤਾਂ ਗੁਲਾਬੀ ਕਰਾਸ ਗੁਲਾਬੀ ਤਿਕੋਣ ਵਿੱਚ ਬਦਲ ਜਾਂਦਾ ਹੈ, ਅਤੇ ਦੂਰ ਜਾਣ 'ਤੇ ਫਿਰ ਵਾਪਸ ਆ ਜਾਂਦਾ ਹੈ।
- ਦੱਸੋ ਕਿ ਘਸੀਟੀ ਗਈ ਵਿੰਡੋ ਆਪਣੀ ਕੰਧ ਉੱਤੇ ਕਦੋਂ ਕੇਂਦਰਿਤ ਹੈਚੁਣੀ ਗਈ ਵਿੰਡੋ ਨੂੰ ਇਸ ਦੀ ਕੰਧ ਦੇ ਨਾਲ ਘਸੀਟੋ ਅਤੇ ਗੁਲਾਬੀ ਨਿਸ਼ਾਨ ਦੇਖੋ ਕਿ ਇਹ ਕਦੋਂ ਕੇਂਦਰਿਤ ਹੈ।
- ਫਲੋਰ ਬੈਕਗ੍ਰਾਊਂਡ ਵਜੋਂ ਸ਼ਾਮਲ ਕੀਤੀ DWG ਜਾਂ ਸਕੇਲ ਕੀਤੀ ਚਿੱਤਰ ਉੱਤੇ ਕੰਧਾਂ ਟ੍ਰੇਸ ਕਰੋਫਲੋਰ ਟ੍ਰੇਸਿੰਗ ਬੈਕਗ੍ਰਾਊਂਡ ਵਜੋਂ DWG ਫਾਈਲ ਜਾਂ ਸਕੇਲ ਕੀਤੀ ਚਿੱਤਰ ਸ਼ਾਮਲ ਕਰੋ, ਫਿਰ ਆਰਕੀਟੈਕਚਰਲ ਵਾਲ ਟੂਲਾਂ ਨਾਲ ਉਸ ਉੱਤੇ ਕੰਧਾਂ ਟ੍ਰੇਸ ਕਰੋ।
- Trim an extra wall or room-divider segmentRemove an extra wall or room-divider segment using the trim shortcut T R or the trim option in the on-screen menu.
- Understand how the Slab tool creates free-standing geometryLearn that a slab always comes in at the top and can be dropped down to the floor.
- Understand W, D and Height on a beamLearn what W, D and Height measure on a beam and how typing new values changes its length and plan width.
- Understand where light is emitted from a fixtureLearn that a fixture's light comes from its yellow spheres rather than its body, with two default light sources giving comparable illumination to the upper and lower halves of the room.
- Understand why a cabinet straddling a room boundary is missing at room levelLearn why a cabinet that sits only partly inside a room and whose centre point falls outside the room boundary is not listed at room level.
- Understand why imported 3D models cannot be edited like native wallsLearn why a 3D model built outside Infernia is not recognised as a native Infernia wall and cannot be edited the same way.
- Upload DWG files or images as tracing backgrounds in floor settingsUpload a DWG file or an image in floor settings to use it as a tracing background.
- Use a floor reference to trace uploaded images or DWG dimensionsUpload an image or DWG dimensions and use them as a background reference for tracing within the design.
- ਕੰਧਾਂ, ਫਰਨੀਚਰ ਅਤੇ ਟਾਈਲਿੰਗ ਜੋੜਨ ਲਈ ਕੀਬੋਰਡ ਸ਼ਾਰਟਕੱਟ ਵਰਤੋਫਰਨੀਚਰ ਜੋੜਨਾ, ਕੰਧ ਖਿੱਚਣਾ, ਟਾਈਲਿੰਗ ਜੋੜਨਾ ਜਾਂ ਦਰਵਾਜ਼ਾ ਰੱਖਣਾ ਵਰਗੇ ਆਮ ਕਮਾਂਡ ਛੋਟਾ ਕੋਡ ਟਾਈਪ ਕਰਕੇ ਅਤੇ Enter ਦਬਾ ਕੇ ਚਲਾਓ।
- ਕੰਧਾਂ ਖਿੱਚਦੇ ਸਮੇਂ ਦਿਸ਼ਾ ਲਾਕ ਕਰਨ ਲਈ ਸਪੇਸਬਾਰ ਦੀ ਵਰਤੋਂ ਕਰੋਸ਼ੁਰੂਆਤੀ ਬਿੰਦੂ ਤੋਂ ਸਿੱਧੀ ਕੰਧ ਖਿੱਚੋ ਅਤੇ ਪੱਕਾ ਕਰਨ ਤੋਂ ਪਹਿਲਾਂ ਚੱਲਦੇ ਸਮੇਂ ਇਸ ਦਾ ਅੰਦਰੂਨੀ ਮਾਪ ਜਾਂਚੋ।
- Use the pick tool to select internal wall faces for ceilings and tilingPick internal wall faces to sketch a ceiling and apply tiling, then adjust tile material, pattern, size and grout appearance room by room.
- Why base units sit 12 mm above the floorBase units are placed with a default Y position of 12 mm so floor tiles can be added later without shifting each unit up.
ਫਲੋਰ ਪਲਾਨ, ਲੇਅਰ ਅਤੇ ਡਰਾਇੰਗ ਟੂਲ167
- Change board size in board layout settings and apply to all boardsSet the board width and length in board layout settings so every board in the design uses the new size.
- Add manual dimensions and measure balance spacePlace dimensions by hand between touching elements and measure the leftover space around placed units.
- Copy, Multiply ਅਤੇ Fixed Distance ਵਿਕਲਪ ਪੈਨਲ ਸ਼ਕਲਾਂ ਦੀ ਨਕਲ ਬਣਾਉਂਦੇ ਹਨਹਰ ਸ਼ਕਲ ਨੂੰ ਵੱਖਰੇ ਤੌਰ 'ਤੇ ਖਿੱਚਣ ਦੀ ਬਜਾਏ ਇੱਕ ਲਾਈਨ ਜਾਂ ਪੈਟਰਨ ਦੇ ਨਾਲ ਪੈਨਲ ਸ਼ਕਲ ਨੂੰ ਦੁਹਰਾਉਣ ਲਈ Copy, Multiply ਅਤੇ Fixed Distance ਵਰਤੋ।
- Create a groove by copying a shape and defining a cutDraw or select a shape, copy it at the required intervals, and define it as a cut groove with a specified depth so it can be included for CAM machining.
- Create custom grooves via panel edit panel designDraw a groove shape on a panel, set it as a cutout with depth and material, then repeat it at a fixed distance.
- Repeat a shape with the Repeat buttonRepeat a selected shape into multiple copies by setting a base point, start point and end point, then adjust or ungroup the repeater as needed.
ਸਭ ਵੇਖੋ (167)
- ਸਪੇਸਿੰਗ ਅਤੇ ਬੇਸ, ਸ਼ੁਰੂਆਤੀ ਅਤੇ ਅੰਤ ਬਿੰਦੂਆਂ ਨਾਲ repeat ਵਰਤੋਲਾਈਨ ਦੇ ਨਾਲ ਦੁਹਰਾਇਆ ਪੈਟਰਨ ਬਣਾਉਣ ਲਈ ਲੋੜੀਂਦੀ ਸਪੇਸਿੰਗ ਅਤੇ ਬਿੰਦੂਆਂ ਨਾਲ repeat ਕਮਾਂਡ ਚਲਾਓ, ਲੋੜ ਪੈਣ 'ਤੇ ਸ਼ੁਰੂਆਤ ਨੂੰ ਕਿਸੇ ਫੀਚਰ ਤੋਂ ਆਫਸੈੱਟ ਕਰੋ ਅਤੇ ਪੈਨਲ ਖਿੱਚਣ ਤੋਂ ਪਹਿਲਾਂ construction lines ਨਾਲ ਹਵਾਲਾ ਖਾਲੀ ਥਾਵਾਂ ਨਿਸ਼ਾਨਿਤ ਕਰੋ।
- ਵਾਧੂ ਮਾਪਾਂ ਨੂੰ ਪੈਰਾਮੀਟਰ ਵਜੋਂ ਸ਼ਾਮਲ ਕਰੋ ਤਾਂ ਜੋ ਉਹ ਵਿਕਲਪ ਵਜੋਂ ਦਿਖਾਈ ਦੇਣਜੋ ਵੀ ਵਾਧੂ ਮਾਪ ਤੁਸੀਂ ਫਰਨੀਚਰ ਉੱਤੇ ਵਿਕਲਪ ਵਜੋਂ ਉਪਲਬਧ ਕਰਵਾਉਣਾ ਚਾਹੁੰਦੇ ਹੋ, ਉਹ Parameter ਹੇਠਾਂ ਸ਼ਾਮਲ ਕਰੋ, ਫਿਰ ਇਸਨੂੰ ਬਣਾਓ ਅਤੇ ਫਰਨੀਚਰ ਨੂੰ ਅੱਪਡੇਟ ਕਰੋ।
- Add, rearrange and lock auto dimensionsAfter adding auto dimensions, fill in any missing ones with the dimension tool, rearrange them, then center and lock the view.
- Adjust dimension text height and arrow propertiesReduce the dimension text height value in the properties panel when dimensions appear too large.
- ਰੱਖੀ ਗਈ ਲਾਈਟ ਫਿਕਸਚਰ ਦੇ ਅੰਦਰਲੇ ਰੋਸ਼ਨੀ ਸਰੋਤਾਂ ਨੂੰ ਸਮਾਯੋਜਿਤ ਕਰੋਹਰੇਕ ਰੋਸ਼ਨੀ ਸਰੋਤ ਦੀ ਸਥਿਤੀ, ਕਿਸਮ, ਤੀਬਰਤਾ ਅਤੇ ਰੰਗ ਸੈੱਟ ਕਰਨ ਲਈ ਰੱਖੀ ਗਈ ਲਾਈਟ ਫਿਕਸਚਰ ਦਾ ਆਪਣਾ ਪੈਨਲ ਖੋਲ੍ਹੋ।
- ਕੰਸਟ੍ਰਕਸ਼ਨ ਅਤੇ position ਫੀਲਡਾਂ ਰਾਹੀਂ ਕੈਬਿਨੇਟ ਲਾਕ ਬਦਲੋ ਜਾਂ ਮੁੜ-ਸਥਿਤ ਕਰੋਕੈਬਿਨੇਟ ਲਾਕ ਨੂੰ 3D ਵਿੱਚ ਚੁਣ ਕੇ ਅਤੇ ਇਸ ਦੀਆਂ position ਫੀਲਡਾਂ ਨੂੰ ਸਮਾਯੋਜਿਤ ਕਰਕੇ ਮੁੜ-ਸਥਿਤ ਕਰੋ, ਕਿਉਂਕਿ ਲਾਕ ਕੈਬਿਨੇਟ ਦਾ ਹਿੱਸਾ ਹੈ, ਆਜ਼ਾਦ ਖੜ੍ਹੀ ਵਸਤੂ ਨਹੀਂ।
- Copy and paste elements between flats with Ctrl+C and Ctrl+VReuse an element such as a chimney duct in a second flat without re-importing and re-aligning it.
- Create and publish sweep profiles for reuse across designsReuse a decorative profile with the sweep tool by drawing a path, defining its cross-section, and publishing it so other designers can pick it from a dropdown.
- ਐਲੀਵੇਸ਼ਨ ਉੱਤੇ ਡਾਇਮੈਨਸ਼ਨ ਲਾਈਨਾਂ ਨੂੰ ਮਿਟਾਓ ਅਤੇ ਮੁੜ ਕ੍ਰਮਬੱਧ ਕਰੋਉਹ ਡਾਇਮੈਨਸ਼ਨ ਲਾਈਨ ਹਟਾਓ ਜਿਸਦੀ ਤੁਹਾਨੂੰ ਹੁਣ ਲੋੜ ਨਹੀਂ ਹੈ, ਫਿਰ ਆਟੋ ਡਾਇਮੈਨਸ਼ਨ ਲਾਈਨਾਂ ਨੂੰ ਲੋੜੀਂਦੇ ਕਤਾਰ ਕ੍ਰਮ ਵਿੱਚ ਖਿੱਚੋ।
- ਸਵੀਪ ਪ੍ਰੋਫਾਈਲ ਨੂੰ ਪੈਰਾਮੀਟਰਾਈਜ਼ ਕਰਨ ਲਈ ਬੇਸ ਸ਼ੇਪ ਦਾ ਪਾਥ ਸੋਧੋਸਵੀਪ ਜਾਂ ਰੀਪੀਟ ਪ੍ਰੋਫਾਈਲ ਦੇ ਸ਼ੁਰੂਆਤੀ ਬਿੰਦੂ ਨੂੰ ਪੈਰਾਮੀਟ੍ਰਿਕ ਬਣਾਓ ਤਾਂ ਜੋ ਪ੍ਰੋਫਾਈਲ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਨਾਲ ਅੱਪਡੇਟ ਹੋਵੇ।
- Exclude element types and layers from auto dimensioningControl which elements get dimensioned through the design's elevation preferences and drawing layers.
- ਐਲੀਵੇਸ਼ਨ ਵਿਊ ਵਿੱਚੋਂ ਗੁੰਮ ਵਸਤੂਆਂ ਠੀਕ ਕਰੋਐਲੀਵੇਸ਼ਨ preferences ਦਾ distance ਮੁੱਲ ਸੈੱਟ ਕਰੋ ਤਾਂ ਜੋ ਕੰਧ ਨੇੜੇ ਦੀਆਂ ਵਸਤੂਆਂ ਕੰਧ ਐਲੀਵੇਸ਼ਨ ਡਰਾਇੰਗ ਵਿੱਚ ਦਿਖਾਈ ਦੇਣ।
- Generate separate floor plans per cabinet type using view-specific layersGive each cabinet type its own plan so base, wall and loft units print separately.
- Get around the design interface: levels bar, plan/3D toggle and properties panelFind the levels bar, the floor plan and 3D toggle, the grouped toolbar, the properties panel and the presentation sheets in the design interface.
- Get to know the design interface toolbars and Home tabLearn which toolbar tabs the design interface offers and what the Home tab and toolbars support.
- ਐਲੀਵੇਸ਼ਨ ਵਿੱਚ ਫਰਨੀਚਰ/ਲਾਈਟਾਂ ਦੀ ਲੇਬਲ ਦਿੱਖ ਰਾਹੀਂ ਲੇਬਲ ਲੁਕਾਓਚੁਣੀਆਂ ਇਕਾਈਆਂ 'ਤੇ ਲੇਬਲ ਦਿੱਖ ਬੰਦ ਕਰੋ ਤਾਂ ਜੋ ਐਲੀਵੇਸ਼ਨ ਦ੍ਰਿਸ਼ ਤੋਂ ਉਹਨਾਂ ਦੇ ਐਨੋਟੇਸ਼ਨ ਲੇਬਲ ਹਟ ਜਾਣ।
- ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਅਸਲ ਦੁਨੀਆ ਦੇ ਲੈਵਲ ਅਤੇ ਮਿਲੀਮੀਟਰ ਕਿਵੇਂ ਵਰਤਦੇ ਹਨਜਾਣੋ ਕਿ ਇੱਕ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਅਸਲ ਦੁਨੀਆ ਦੇ ਲੈਵਲਾਂ ਵਿੱਚ ਕਿਵੇਂ ਬਣਾਇਆ ਜਾਂਦਾ ਹੈ ਅਤੇ ਉਤਪਾਦਨ ਲਈ ਪ੍ਰੋਜੈਕਟ ਯੂਨਿਟ ਵਜੋਂ ਮਿਲੀਮੀਟਰ ਕਿਉਂ ਸੈੱਟ ਕਰਨੇ ਚਾਹੀਦੇ ਹਨ।
- Import a floor plan with AI Floor plan and set its scaleUpload a floor plan, draw a line on the preview and type its real length in mm so walls, rooms, doors and windows are placed from the origin you click.
- Lock a customised view and add it to a presentationLock a customised view so it can be added directly to a presentation, knowing the lock applies only to that specific view.
- Move an object an exact distance using the translate panelMove a selected object by an exact distance by entering the amount in the translate panel's axis position field.
- Move items with 3D gimbalsSelect an item to show its three gimbals, then drag or type an axis value to move it.
- ਲੌਗਇਨ ਤੋਂ ਬਿਨਾਂ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਦਾ ਸ਼ੇਅਰ ਲਿੰਕ ਖੋਲ੍ਹੋਬ੍ਰਾਊਜ਼ਰ ਵਿੱਚ ਬਿਨਾਂ ਲੌਗਇਨ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਦਾ ਸ਼ੇਅਰ ਲਿੰਕ ਖੋਲ੍ਹੋ ਅਤੇ ਫਲੋਰ ਚੋਣਕਾਰ, Select Room, Floor Plan / 3D, Free View ਅਤੇ ਇੱਕ ਟਿੱਪਣੀ ਬਟਨ ਵਾਲਾ ਸਿਰਫ਼-ਪੜ੍ਹਨ ਦ੍ਰਿਸ਼ ਵੇਖੋ।
- Repeat panels with multiply at fixed distance or multiply fixed copyRepeat a panel at a set spacing, or spread a fixed number of panels evenly across a wall.
- Rotate a cabinet and set its position and rotationTurn a selected cabinet with the space bar or an exact Y angle, rotate a panel's finish, and read Position Y correctly against bottom height.
- Select multiple objects with area select and delete themDrag across several objects with area select, then remove them with the keyboard Delete key or the delete action in the selection's left panel.
- Set the dimension line colour to a valid hex valueThe dimension line colour defaults to black (#000000), so enter a valid hex value to avoid mirror or blink visuals.
- Switch between 2D and 3D modes with changes kept in syncSwitch between floor plan (2D) mode and 3D mode and see your changes carried across in both directions.
- Toggle X-ray mode for cabinets with the XR shortcutToggle X-ray mode with the XR shortcut to inspect cabinet internals quickly, even across several selected cabinets at once.
- Turn on auto snapping to constrain walls to 90 degreesTurn on Orthogonal Snapping so the walls and lines you draw stay at 90 degrees, then join walls with Trim/Extend to Corner.
- XR ਸ਼ਾਰਟਕੱਟ ਜਾਂ Construction ਮੀਨੂ ਨਾਲ X-ray ਮੋਡ ਚਾਲੂ ਕਰੋXR ਸ਼ਾਰਟਕੱਟ, Construction ਮੀਨੂ ਜਾਂ ਖੱਬੇ ਪਾਸੇ ਦੇ ਮੀਨੂ ਨਾਲ ਫਰਨੀਚਰ ਨੂੰ X-ray ਮੋਡ ਵਿੱਚ ਬਦਲੋ।
- Understand how layers come by default in InfurniaLearn that every item in Infurnia has a layer and that layers come by default.
- ਸਹੀ ਡਰਾਇੰਗ ਲੇਅਰ 'ਤੇ ਆਟੋ ਡਾਇਮੈਨਸ਼ਨ ਵਰਤੋਪਹਿਲਾਂ ਯੂਨਿਟਾਂ ਨੂੰ ਮੇਲ ਖਾਂਦੀ ਪਲਾਨ ਲੇਅਰ 'ਤੇ ਸੈੱਟ ਕਰੋ, ਫਿਰ ਇੱਕੋ ਵਾਰ ਹਰ ਕੈਬਿਨੇਟ ਡਾਇਮੈਨਸ਼ਨ ਭਰਨ ਲਈ ਆਟੋ ਡਾਇਮੈਨਸ਼ਨ ਸ਼ਾਮਲ ਕਰੋ।
- ਸਹੀ ਦੂਰੀ ਲਈ ਖਿੱਚਣ ਦੀ ਬਜਾਏ move tool (MV) ਵਰਤੋਖਿੱਚਣ ਦੀ ਬਜਾਏ move tool ਵਰਤ ਕੇ ਕਿਸੇ ਵਸਤੂ ਨੂੰ ਸਹੀ ਦੂਰੀ ਤੱਕ ਲਿਜਾਓ।
- Use X-ray mode via toggle when XR shortcut failsTurn on X-ray mode with X or the toggle when XR and Enter does nothing, then click a hinge or component to select it.
- View connectors in 3D using X-ray mode shortcut XR enterToggle X-ray mode on a selected cabinet to inspect its connectors in the 3D view, then return to normal selection.
- Add a compass to a floor planPlace a compass on the floor plan with Annotate > Compass and adjust it in the Compass panel.
- Add an independent railingDraw a railing's path in the 2D sketcher and then adjust it from the Railing panel.
- Add arrows, guidelines and text on a view using draw-over and annotateAdd arrows and text annotations to a view, then lock it so the annotations stay in place.
- Align dimension ਨਾਲ ਕਿਨਾਰੇ ਤੋਂ ਕਿਨਾਰੇ ਤੱਕ ਮਾਪ ਕੇ ਕਮਰੇ ਦਰ ਕਮਰੇ ਮਾਪ ਜੋੜੋAlign dimension ਨਾਲ ਇੱਕ ਸਮੇਂ ਇੱਕ ਕਮਰਾ ਮਾਪ ਜੋੜੋ, ਜੋ ਕਿਨਾਰੇ ਤੋਂ ਕਿਨਾਰੇ ਤੱਕ ਮਾਪਦਾ ਹੈ, ਅਤੇ ਉਹਨਾਂ ਨੂੰ ਆਪਣੀ ਚੁਣੀ ਹੋਈ ਲੇਅਰ ਉੱਤੇ ਰੱਖੋ।
- Add free text with custom size and color instead of annotationsSet the size and color of free text before you place it, and give different text different colors.
- Add hatch, dimensions, text and arrow annotationsDraw a hatch rectangle, adjust its scale and apply it, then edit arrow head size, text size and text colour in the properties panel.
- Add rectangles with offsets and use copy multiply for repeatsAdd rectangles with the required offset and then use copy-multiply-straight-fixed-copy to create multiple copies in one step.
- Add text labels and arrow-head callouts with annotateAdd text labels and arrow-head callouts to a view so you can point out details in your scene.
- Add text labels to elements and delete them when no longer neededLabel what an element is with text, adjust its size and colour, and delete elements you no longer need.
- Assign annotations and leaders to the relevant layer for easy switchingLearn which layers text boxes and leader lines use by default and how to hide objects with the system hidden layer.
- ਚੋਣ ਕੀਤੇ ਤੱਤਾਂ ਨੂੰ change drawing layer ਰਾਹੀਂ ਲੇਅਰ ਵਿੱਚ ਅਸਾਈਨ ਕਰੋਚੋਣ ਕੀਤੀਆਂ ਚੀਜ਼ਾਂ ਨੂੰ change drawing layer ਵਿਕਲਪ ਨਾਲ ਲੇਅਰ ਵਿੱਚ ਭੇਜੋ, ਫਿਰ ਇੱਕ ਕੈਬਿਨੈਟ ਦੀ ਲੇਅਰ ਉਸਦੇ customize ਪੈਨਲ ਵਿੱਚ ਪੁਸ਼ਟੀ ਕਰੋ।
- Choose Draw or Annotate tools for shapes, notes and dimensionsLearn which floor plan editor tools draw geometry and which add text, dimensions and leader lines, and how to set annotation styles before placing them.
- ਵਸਤੂਆਂ ਦੀ ਨਕਲ ਕਰਦੇ ਸਮੇਂ ਸਥਿਰ ਕਾਪੀਆਂ ਜਾਂ ਸਥਿਰ ਦੂਰੀ ਚੁਣੋਤੈਅ ਕਰੋ ਕਿ ਖਿੱਚਦੇ ਸਮੇਂ ਕਾਪੀਆਂ ਦੀ ਗਿਣਤੀ ਜਾਂ ਉਨ੍ਹਾਂ ਵਿਚਕਾਰ ਦੂਰੀ ਸਥਿਰ ਰਹੇ।
- Control layers per view separately from global layersSet each 3D, floor plan, elevation or section view to show only the layers you want, while global layers still control the overall model.
- Control what information is shown with drawing layersUse drawing layers to control what information is shown on a drawing.
- Copy and paste a unit with Ctrl+C and Ctrl+VCopy a unit and paste as many copies as you need, with the quotation/costing line generated automatically for each copy.
- Ctrl+C ਅਤੇ Ctrl+V ਨਾਲ ਤੱਤ ਕਾਪੀ ਅਤੇ ਪੇਸਟ ਕਰੋCtrl+C ਅਤੇ Ctrl+V ਸ਼ਾਰਟਕੱਟਾਂ ਨਾਲ ਤੱਤ ਕਾਪੀ ਅਤੇ ਪੇਸਟ ਕਰੋ, ਫਿਰ ਦਰਵਾਜ਼ੇ ਅਤੇ ਖਿੜਕੀਆਂ ਕੰਧ ਉੱਤੇ ਰੱਖੋ।
- Copy and paste units at drawing levelDuplicate units on the drawing with the standard copy-paste shortcut so similar units can be placed repeatedly without rebuilding them.
- ਕਿਸੇ ਵਸਤੂ ਨੂੰ ਕਿਸੇ ਹੋਰ ਮੰਜ਼ਿਲ ਉੱਤੇ ਉਸੇ ਥਾਂ ਤੇ ਕਾਪੀ ਕਰੋਕਿਸੇ ਵਸਤੂ ਨੂੰ ਕਾਪੀ ਕਰੋ ਅਤੇ ਇੱਕ ਜਾਂ ਵੱਧ ਹੋਰ ਮੰਜ਼ਿਲਾਂ ਉੱਤੇ ਪੇਸਟ ਕਰੋ ਤਾਂ ਜੋ ਉਹ ਉੱਥੇ ਉਸੇ ਪਲਾਨ ਥਾਂ ਉੱਤੇ ਆ ਜਾਵੇ।
- Copy ਇੱਕ ਕਾਪੀ ਬਣਾਉਂਦਾ ਹੈ; multiply ਵਾਰ-ਵਾਰ ਕਾਪੀਆਂ ਬਣਾਉਂਦਾ ਹੈਜਾਣੋ ਕਿ copy ਟੂਲ ਦੇ copy ਅਤੇ multiply ਵਿਕਲਪ ਕਿਵੇਂ ਵੱਖਰੇ ਹਨ, ਤਾਂ ਜੋ ਤੁਸੀਂ ਕਿਸੇ ਆਕਾਰ ਦੀ ਇੱਕ ਵਾਰ ਜਾਂ ਨਿਯਮਿਤ ਅੰਤਰਾਲ 'ਤੇ ਦੁਹਰਾਈ ਕਰ ਸਕੋ।
- Copy objects with the multiply optionPlace a fixed number of copies of an object using the multiply option of the copy tool.
- Copy-paste places repeated copies until Escape is pressedDuplicate a placed unit with Ctrl+C and Ctrl+V, then keep clicking to place as many identical copies as you need.
- Create a custom plan from the three-dot menu next to 3D viewCreate a custom plan in the design portal and understand the cut depth it uses.
- Create a framing profile around a shape with offset copyDraw the outline with extrude line and three-point arc, then use offset copy to build a parallel framing profile around it.
- ਕਸਟਮ ਲੇਅਰਾਂ ਬਣਾਓ ਅਤੇ ਉਹਨਾਂ ਵਿੱਚ ਆਈਟਮਾਂ ਨਿਰਧਾਰਿਤ ਕਰੋਕਸਟਮ ਸੈਕਸ਼ਨ ਵਿੱਚ ਆਪਣੀਆਂ ਲੇਅਰਾਂ ਬਣਾਓ ਅਤੇ ਆਈਟਮਾਂ ਨੂੰ ਉਹਨਾਂ ਉੱਤੇ ਲੈ ਜਾਓ ਤਾਂ ਜੋ ਤੁਸੀਂ ਉਹਨਾਂ ਨੂੰ ਇਕੱਠੇ ਦਿਖਾ, ਲੁਕਾ ਅਤੇ ਰੰਗ ਸਕੋ।
- ਪਾਥ ਅਤੇ ਪ੍ਰੋਫਾਈਲ ਨਾਲ ਸਵੀਪ ਵਰਤ ਕੇ ਪੈਟਰਨ ਵਾਲੀ ਟ੍ਰਿਮ ਬਣਾਓਟ੍ਰਿਮ ਦਾ ਆਊਟਲਾਈਨ ਪਾਥ ਵਜੋਂ ਖਿੱਚੋ, ਫਿਰ ਪੈਟਰਨ ਵਾਲੀ ਟ੍ਰਿਮ ਜਾਂ ਮੋਲਡਿੰਗ ਬਣਾਉਣ ਲਈ ਉਸ ਦੇ ਨਾਲ-ਨਾਲ ਇੱਕ ਪ੍ਰੋਫਾਈਲ ਸ਼ਕਲ ਸਵੀਪ ਕਰੋ।
- Dimension point-to-point, line-to-line, or with auto dimensionsAdd point-to-point, line-to-line or automatic dimensions to your design and remove any you do not want.
- ਗੁਣਾ ਸਿੱਧੀ ਸਥਿਰ ਕਾਪੀ ਨਾਲ ਰੋਸ਼ਨੀਆਂ ਨੂੰ ਬਰਾਬਰ ਵੰਡੋਹਰ ਇੱਕ ਨੂੰ ਹੱਥੀਂ ਰੱਖੇ ਬਿਨਾਂ, ਵਸਤੂਆਂ ਨੂੰ ਸਥਿਰ ਦੂਰੀ 'ਤੇ ਕਾਪੀ ਕਰਕੇ ਇੱਕ ਲਾਈਨ ਦੇ ਨਾਲ ਰੋਸ਼ਨੀ ਫਿਕਸਚਰ ਦੁਹਰਾਓ।
- ਸਕੈਚਰ ਵਿੱਚ 3-point arc ਬਟਨ ਨਾਲ ਇੱਕ ਚਾਪ ਖਿੱਚੋਇੱਕ ਚਾਪ ਖਿੱਚਣ ਲਈ ਉਸ ਦੇ ਸ਼ੁਰੂ, ਉਸ ਦੇ ਅੰਤ, ਫਿਰ ਉਸ ਬਿੰਦੂ 'ਤੇ ਕਲਿੱਕ ਕਰੋ ਜਿਸ ਵਿੱਚੋਂ ਇਹ ਲੰਘਦੀ ਹੈ, ਅਤੇ ਤਿੰਨ ਲਾਈਨਾਂ ਨੂੰ ਇੱਕ ਵਕਰ ਕਿਨਾਰੇ ਵਾਲੀ ਸ਼ਕਲ ਵਿੱਚ ਬੰਦ ਕਰੋ।
- Draw and configure hatching in the drawing viewAdd hatching to your drawing by drawing a boundary and applying it, then adjust its configuration and scale.
- Arc Drawing ਮੋਡਾਂ ਨਾਲ ਘੁਮਾਉਂਦੀਆਂ ਕੰਧਾਂ ਖਿੱਚੋDraw by Bending, Draw around Center ਜਾਂ Draw along Tangent ਵਰਤ ਕੇ ਘੁਮਾਉਂਦੀਆਂ ਕੰਧਾਂ ਖਿੱਚੋ, ਅਤੇ ਕੰਧ ਦੇ ਖੱਬੇ ਪੈਨਲ ਤੋਂ ਰੇਡੀਅਸ ਸਮਾਓ।
- ਪਲਾਨਾਂ ਅਤੇ ਐਲੀਵੇਸ਼ਨਾਂ ਵਿੱਚ ਹਵਾਲਾ ਆਈਟਮਾਂ ਖਿੱਚੋ ਅਤੇ ਲੇਬਲਾਂ ਦੀ ਟਿੱਪਣੀ ਕਰੋਡਰਾਅ ਟੂਲਾਂ ਨਾਲ ਹਵਾਲਾ ਆਈਟਮਾਂ ਖਿੱਚੋ, ਐਨੋਟੇਟ ਟੂਲਾਂ ਨਾਲ ਉਹਨਾਂ ਨੂੰ ਲੇਬਲ ਕਰੋ, ਅਤੇ ਡਰਾਇੰਗ ਪੂਰੀ ਕਰਨ ਲਈ ਲੋੜ ਅਨੁਸਾਰ ਲੇਅਰਾਂ ਸੈੱਟ ਕਰੋ।
- Edit a placed unit's dimensions from the floor planSelect a placed unit in the floor plan and change its dimensions directly from the dimension fields so it updates immediately.
- ਰੀਪੀਟਰ ਦੀ ਬੇਸ ਸ਼ੇਪ ਸੋਧੋ ਅਤੇ ਰੀਪੀਟਰ ਹਟਾਓਰੀਪੀਟਰ ਦੀ ਬੇਸ ਸ਼ੇਪ ਖੋਲ੍ਹੋ ਤਾਂ ਜੋ ਹਰ ਕਾਪੀ ਇੱਕੋ ਵਾਰ ਬਦਲੀ ਜਾ ਸਕੇ, Back ਨਾਲ ਵਾਪਸ ਜਾਓ, ਅਤੇ ਰੀਪੀਟਰ ਹਟਾਓ ਤਾਂ ਜੋ ਬੇਸ ਸ਼ੇਪ ਆਮ ਸ਼ੇਪ ਵਜੋਂ ਬਹਾਲ ਹੋ ਜਾਵੇ।
- Edit a window after adding itSelect the window to open its Window panel and adjust its drawing layer, dimensions, shift, location, model, meshes and materials, or delete it.
- ਮਿਕਸਡ ਸਕੈਚ ਚੋਣਾਂ ਨੂੰ ਸੰਪਾਦਿਤ ਕਰੋ ਅਤੇ Offset ਮੋਡ ਨੂੰ ਦੁਬਾਰਾ ਵਰਤੋਲਾਈਨਾਂ ਅਤੇ ਚੱਕਰ ਇਕੱਠੇ ਚੁਣੋ ਅਤੇ ਹਰ ਕਿਸਮ ਦੀਆਂ ਵਿਸ਼ੇਸ਼ਤਾਵਾਂ ਨੂੰ ਉਸਦੇ ਆਪਣੇ ਪੈਨਲ ਭਾਗ ਵਿੱਚ ਬਦਲੋ, ਅਤੇ ਜਾਣੋ ਕਿ Offset ਟੂਲ ਉਹੀ Copy ਜਾਂ Move ਮੋਡ ਰੱਖਦਾ ਹੈ ਜੋ ਤੁਸੀਂ ਆਖਰੀ ਵਾਰ ਚੁਣਿਆ ਸੀ।
- Enable Rotate by switching to 3D viewEnter 3D mode from the navbar so the greyed-out Rotate tool becomes available.
- Find modelling tools and properties in the Home tabUse the Home tab to reach frequently used modelling tools and the properties bar to view and edit whatever you click in the 3D scene.
- Find the navigation bar, tool tabs and toolbar in the workspaceLearn the order of the workspace from top to bottom so you know where the navigation bar, tool tabs and the selected tab's toolbar sit.
- Find the Rotate tool and what it doesLocate the Rotate control and use it to turn an object around an axis.
- Find tools on the Home toolbar and the other tabsLearn which frequently used tools sit on the Home button and where the remaining tools live across the Architecture, Draw, Insert, Annotate, View, Render and Outputs tabs.
- Fix a red bounding box that shows overlap after snappingUnderstand why a red bounding box can appear even when units snap correctly.
- Fix the non-zero area error when adding a slab, ceiling, roof, rail or tilingSlab, Add Ceiling, Roof, Rail and Tiling all open the 2D sketcher, where you draw a closed shape before applying.
- Flip face to see shapes drawn on the other sideSwitch to the face where a shape was drawn so it becomes visible.
- Format elevation name text labelsWith the text selected, use the left panel to set bold, underline, alignment, colour and size.
- ਲੇਅਰ ਪੈਨਲ ਵਿੱਚ ਲੇਅਰਾਂ ਦੀ ਵਰਤੋਂ ਕਰਕੇ ਆਈਟਮਾਂ ਨੂੰ ਲੁਕਾਓ ਜਾਂ ਦਿਖਾਓਉਸ ਲੇਅਰ ਦੀ ਦਿੱਖ ਬਦਲ ਕੇ, ਜਿਸ ਉੱਤੇ ਆਈਟਮਾਂ ਹਨ, ਆਈਟਮਾਂ ਦੇ ਪੂਰੇ ਸਮੂਹਾਂ ਨੂੰ ਇੱਕ ਵਾਰ ਵਿੱਚ ਲੁਕਾਓ ਜਾਂ ਦਿਖਾਓ।
- 2D ਡਰਾਇੰਗਾਂ 3D ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਤੋਂ ਆਪਣੇ ਆਪ ਕਿਵੇਂ ਅੱਪਡੇਟ ਹੁੰਦੀਆਂ ਹਨਜਾਣੋ ਕਿ 3D ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਵਿੱਚ ਕੀਤੇ ਬਦਲਾਅ ਵੱਖਰੇ ਤੌਰ 'ਤੇ ਸੋਧੇ ਬਿਨਾਂ ਤੁਹਾਡੀਆਂ 2D ਡਰਾਇੰਗਾਂ ਅਤੇ ਪ੍ਰਸਤੁਤੀ ਤੱਕ ਕਿਵੇਂ ਪਹੁੰਚਦੇ ਹਨ।
- ਲੀਨੀਅਰ ਰੀਪੀਟਰ ਦੀਆਂ ਕਾਪੀਆਂ ਦੀ ਗਿਣਤੀ ਕਿਵੇਂ ਗਿਣੀ ਜਾਂਦੀ ਹੈਜਾਣੋ ਕਿ ਸ਼ੁਰੂਆਤੀ ਬਿੰਦੂ ਤੋਂ ਅੰਤ ਬਿੰਦੂ ਤੱਕ ਦੀ ਦੂਰੀ ਅਤੇ ਸਪੇਸਿੰਗ ਇਹ ਕਿਵੇਂ ਤੈਅ ਕਰਦੇ ਹਨ ਕਿ ਲੀਨੀਅਰ ਰੀਪੀਟਰ ਕਿੰਨੀਆਂ ਕਾਪੀਆਂ ਬਣਾਉਂਦਾ ਹੈ।
- How converting a design group to a user component worksConverting a design group to a user component cannot be undone directly, and dimensions on the component are kept.
- ਰੀਲੋਡ 'ਤੇ ਡਾਇਮੈਨਸ਼ਨ ਲਾਈਨਾਂ ਐਲੀਮੈਂਟ ਸਨੈਪ ਪੁਆਇੰਟਾਂ ਨਾਲ ਕਿਵੇਂ ਦੁਬਾਰਾ ਜੁੜਦੀਆਂ ਹਨਜਾਣੋ ਕਿ ਇੱਕ ਡਾਇਮੈਨਸ਼ਨ ਲਾਈਨ ਰੀਲੋਡਾਂ ਦੌਰਾਨ ਐਲੀਮੈਂਟ ਦੇ ਨਾਮ ਵਾਲੇ ਸਨੈਪ ਪੁਆਇੰਟ ਨਾਲ ਆਪਣਾ ਜੁੜਾਅ ਕਿਵੇਂ ਬਣਾਈ ਰੱਖਦੀ ਹੈ, ਅਤੇ ਜਦੋਂ ਉਹ ਸਨੈਪ ਪੁਆਇੰਟ ਗਾਇਬ ਹੋ ਜਾਂਦਾ ਹੈ ਤਾਂ ਕੀ ਹੁੰਦਾ ਹੈ।
- How dimension values reflect true model dimensionsLearn why dimension values in a design or elevation come from the true model dimensions and how to add extra measurements with the Align tool under Annotate.
- ਤੱਤ ਕਿਵੇਂ ਗਲੋਬਲ ਲੇਅਰਾਂ ਨਾਲ ਆਪਣੇ-ਆਪ ਜੋੜੇ ਜਾਂਦੇ ਹਨਤੁਹਾਡੇ ਵੱਲੋਂ ਸ਼ਾਮਲ ਕੀਤਾ ਹਰ ਤੱਤ ਆਪਣੇ-ਆਪ ਆਪਣੀ ਗਲੋਬਲ ਲੇਅਰ ਉੱਤੇ ਰੱਖਿਆ ਜਾਂਦਾ ਹੈ, ਅਤੇ ਤੁਸੀਂ ਆਈਟਮਾਂ ਨੂੰ ਕਸਟਮ ਲੇਅਰ ਉੱਤੇ ਦੁਬਾਰਾ ਸਮੂਹਿਤ ਕਰ ਸਕਦੇ ਹੋ।
- ਜਾਣੋ ਕਿ ਨਵੇਂ ਪ੍ਰੋਜੈਕਟ ਕਿਹੜੀਆਂ ਇਕਾਈਆਂ ਅਤੇ ਸ਼ੁੱਧਤਾ ਵਰਤਦੇ ਹਨਨਵੇਂ ਪ੍ਰੋਜੈਕਟ ਮਿਲੀਮੀਟਰਾਂ ਵਿੱਚ ਮਾਪੇ ਜਾਂਦੇ ਹਨ, 1 mm ਤੱਕ ਸ਼ੁੱਧਤਾ ਨਾਲ।
- Lock a 3D view with plus view to return to your working angleLock your working camera angle, then zoom and navigate freely and return to it instead of resetting the camera by hand.
- ਆਕਾਰ ਸੈੱਟ ਕਰਨ ਤੋਂ ਬਾਅਦ ਐਲੀਵੇਸ਼ਨ ਵਿਊਜ਼ ਨੂੰ ਲਾਕ ਕਰੋ ਤਾਂ ਜੋ ਉਹ ਸੁਰੱਖਿਅਤ ਰਹਿਣਆਕਾਰ ਜੋੜਨ ਅਤੇ ਨਾਮ ਦੇਣ ਤੋਂ ਬਾਅਦ ਐਲੀਵੇਸ਼ਨ ਵਿਊ ਨੂੰ ਲਾਕ ਕਰੋ ਤਾਂ ਜੋ ਫਲੋਰ ਪਲਾਨ ਜਾਂ 3D 'ਤੇ ਜਾਣ 'ਤੇ ਇਸ ਦੀਆਂ ਸੈਟਿੰਗਾਂ ਬਚੀਆਂ ਰਹਿਣ।
- ਮਾਪ ਅਤੇ ਐਨੋਟੇਸ਼ਨ ਪੂਰੇ ਕਰਨ ਤੋਂ ਬਾਅਦ ਵਿਊ ਨੂੰ ਲਾਕ ਕਰੋਮਾਪ ਅਤੇ ਐਨੋਟੇਸ਼ਨ ਸ਼ਾਮਲ ਕਰਨ ਤੋਂ ਬਾਅਦ ਸੈਟਿੰਗਾਂ ਤੋਂ ਵਿਊ ਨੂੰ ਦੁਬਾਰਾ ਲਾਕ ਕਰੋ ਤਾਂ ਜੋ ਪੂਰਾ ਹੋਇਆ ਮਾਪ ਅਤੇ ਵੇਰਵਾ ਆਪਣੀ ਥਾਂ 'ਤੇ ਰਹੇ।
- ਕੈਮਰਾ ਸਥਿਤੀ ਨੂੰ ਸੁਰੱਖਿਅਤ ਰੱਖਣ ਲਈ ਦ੍ਰਿਸ਼ ਨੂੰ ਲਾਕ ਕਰੋਨੈਵੀਗੇਟ ਕਰਦੇ ਸਮੇਂ ਕੈਮਰਾ ਸਥਿਤੀ ਨੂੰ ਸੁਰੱਖਿਅਤ ਰੱਖਣ ਲਈ ਦ੍ਰਿਸ਼ ਨੂੰ ਲਾਕ ਕਰੋ।
- Lock units against movementToggle the lock movement button in a selected unit's property panel header to lock it against movement.
- Make a component and confirm it is placed in the designCreate a component and check that it is confirmed, listed under Components in Design and placed as a copy you can select.
- Manage global layers from global preferencesOpen the fourth global preferences button to manage system and custom layers, set them global or view-specific, and control rich view with finishes per layer.
- Match gimbal arrow colours to the Position panel axesLearn how the colour of each gimbal arrow tells you which axis value in the Position panel to edit.
- Measure a distance with the ME shortcutUse ME and pick two points to measure the distance between them.
- Mirror a panel design shape onto the opposite shutterMirror a selected shape with MI, switch the operation from copy to move, and pick from the centre top to the centre bottom so it lands on the opposite shutter.
- Mirror selected geometry about a picked centre pointReflect the selected object to the other side of a centre point you pick.
- Move a component along the X, Y or Z axisLearn which direction the X, Y and Z axes run so you can move a component along a specific axis using the directions.
- Move a selected object with keys and gimbal arrowsLearn the keyboard and gimbal-arrow shortcuts that move a selected object by exact distances in the floor plan and 3D view.
- Move a unit with the gimbal or the position fieldsReposition a unit in the floor plan or with the 3D gimbal, using the coloured axis handles to move it in the direction you want.
- Move elements with MV and snap only to green dotsReposition an element such as a loft with the MV command, then pull it slightly forward to fine-tune its position.
- Navigate and zoom with an external mouse and keyboard shortcutsPan with shift and the middle mouse button, and zoom in, out, all or to selection with keyboard shortcuts.
- Navigate the 3D view with a long-press of the mouse scroll buttonMove around the 3D view by long-pressing the mouse scroll button to navigate the workspace.
- Offset a line with copy or move in panel designChoose copy to duplicate a selected line at a distance or move to relocate it without a duplicate.
- Offset only applies to the lines that exist in the sketchWhen you offset a line in panel edit shape, the offset is generated only for the lines already drawn.
- Open Preferences and switch comment mode in a designOpen the Preferences panel to view and change the Active Sales Channel, and switch the 3D view into comment mode.
- ਫਲੋਰ ਪਲਾਨ ਤੋਂ Tiling Sketcher Mode ਖੋਲ੍ਹੋਫਲੋਰ ਪਲਾਨ ਤੋਂ Tiling Sketcher Mode ਖੋਲ੍ਹੋ ਅਤੇ ਕੰਮ ਮੁਕਾ ਕੇ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ 'ਤੇ ਵਾਪਸ ਆਓ।
- Override layer line styles in a view's View Specific LayersSet a layer's Line Color, Line Type and Line Thickness for one view with its pencil, and see which layers are Overridden.
- ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਵਿਊਪੋਰਟ ਨੂੰ ਪੈਨ, ਆਰਬਿਟ ਅਤੇ ਜ਼ੂਮ ਕਰੋਪੈਨ, ਆਰਬਿਟ ਅਤੇ ਜ਼ੂਮ ਲਈ ਮਾਊਸ ਅਤੇ ਕੀਬੋਰਡ ਸ਼ਾਰਟਕੱਟਾਂ ਦੀ ਵਰਤੋਂ ਕਰਕੇ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਵਿਊਪੋਰਟ ਵਿੱਚ ਘੁੰਮੋ।
- Pick an object and set its rotationWith the tool active, select the object and rotate it by dragging or typing the angle.
- Position drills in 2D panel mode with XYZ coordinatesAdd drills in 2D panel mode and fine-tune their placement by applying an offset to the default position.
- Rename a view in Free viewDouble-click a view to rename it.
- ਕਾਪੀ ਮੋਡ ਫਿਕਸਡ ਦੂਰੀ ਨਾਲ ਕਿਸੇ ਵਸਤੂ ਨੂੰ ਨਿਸ਼ਚਿਤ ਅੰਤਰਾਲ 'ਤੇ ਦੁਹਰਾਓਕਾਪੀ ਕਮਾਂਡ ਚਲਾ ਕੇ, ਕਾਪੀ ਮੋਡ ਚੁਣ ਕੇ ਅਤੇ ਫਿਕਸਡ ਦੂਰੀ ਸੈੱਟ ਕਰਕੇ ਕਿਸੇ ਵਸਤੂ ਨੂੰ ਨਿਯਮਿਤ ਅੰਤਰਾਲਾਂ 'ਤੇ ਦੁਹਰਾਓ।
- Repeat profiles with automatic parameter calculationUse the repeater tool in Edit Panel Design to copy and array profiles while the spacing and end point parameters update automatically with the panel size.
- Resize imported 3D models by height, width and depthAdjust an imported 3D model's height, width and depth so it appears at the right size, with the aspect ratio keeping it proportional.
- Revert a sketch panel to a simple rectangular panelConvert a sketch panel back to a simple rectangular shape using Revert on its Edit Shape toolbar, confirming the prompt to continue.
- Rotate a displaced loft unit back to its original orientationRotate the loft unit three more times to bring it back to its original orientation.
- Rotate and place units precisely with spacebar and MVRotate a unit while placing it with the spacebar, then use the MV shortcut for precise placement.
- Rotate furniture in 2D around its center pointTurn a furniture item in 2D with the space bar for 90-degree steps or the rotation arrows for custom angles, always around its center point.
- Rotate objects from the Sketch tab in the designOpen the Sketch tab in the design and choose Rotate once sketch tools are enabled.
- Rotate objects in the 2D sketcher and 2D machiningOpen the Home tab in the 2D sketcher, tiling and cutting mode or panel 2D machining and choose Rotate.
- Rotate the 3D view using bottom-right controlsOrbit the model with the rotation controls to view it from any side without changing the design itself.
- 3D ਦ੍ਰਿਸ਼ ਨੂੰ ਮੱਧ ਮਾਊਸ ਬਟਨ ਨਾਲ ਘੁਮਾਓ3D ਦ੍ਰਿਸ਼ ਨੂੰ ਮੱਧ ਮਾਊਸ ਬਟਨ ਨਾਲ ਘੁਮਾਓ, ਜਾਂ ਇਹੀ ਕੰਮ ਲਈ ਕੰਮ ਵਾਲੀ ਥਾਂ ਦੇ ਹੇਠਾਂ ਸੱਜੇ ਪਾਸੇ ਵਾਲਾ viewing wheel ਵਰਤੋ।
- Round shape corners using the fillet radius optionCurve a corner of a drawn shape by setting the Fillet Tool's edge length reduction and applying it to two adjoining edges.
- Search and place props in the designFind a prop by searching and place it in your design.
- ਸ਼ਾਰਟਕੱਟ ਪੈਨਲ ਤੋਂ ਕੋਈ ਵੀ ਕਮਾਂਡ ਜਾਂ ਸ਼ਾਰਟਕੱਟ ਖੋਜੋਮੀਨੂ ਵਿੱਚ ਭਾਲਣ ਦੀ ਬਜਾਏ ਸ਼ਾਰਟਕੱਟ ਪੈਨਲ ਦੀ ਖੋਜ ਵਿੱਚ ਟਾਈਪ ਕਰਕੇ ਕੋਈ ਵੀ ਕਮਾਂਡ ਜਾਂ ਸ਼ਾਰਟਕੱਟ ਲੱਭੋ।
- ਘੁਮਾਉਣ ਤੋਂ ਪਹਿਲਾਂ ਕੈਬਿਨੈਟ ਚੁਣੋਪਹਿਲਾਂ ਕੈਬਿਨੈਟ ਚੁਣੋ ਤਾਂ ਜੋ ਇਸਨੂੰ ਘੁਮਾਉਣ ਨਾਲ ਇਹ ਇਸਦੇ ਬਾਊਂਡਿੰਗ ਬਾਕਸ ਤੋਂ ਬਾਹਰ ਨਾ ਹੋ ਜਾਵੇ।
- Select items in the design portal with the left mouse buttonUse the left mouse button in the design portal to select items.
- Select items with left-to-right and right-to-left dragsDraw a selection box in either direction to pick contained or touching items, and marquee-select in 3D.
- Select multiple objects with area selectDrag the mouse across several objects to select them all at once with area select.
- Set default door, window and wall properties via PreferencesSet default properties for repeated elements so newly added doors, windows, elevations and walls inherit the same values across all rooms.
- Set exterior lighting with Env. Map or Sun lightOpen Exterior Lighting and choose either an environment map or sunlight to light the outside of your design.
- Set modular furniture size via quick access dimensionsChange the size of a placed modular furniture model by updating its quick access dimensions.
- Set the wall location line to match the dimension typeMatch the wall location line to the dimension you need so outer-to-outer, inner-to-inner and centre-to-centre values measure from the intended face.
- Set up a repeater's Angular modePlace copies around a centre point by setting the Angular mode's centre, radius, angles, step and direction.
- ਵਿਊ ਸੈਟਿੰਗ ਬਾਰ ਵਿੱਚ ਵਿਊ ਸੈੱਟ ਕਰੋਵਿਊ ਸੈਟਿੰਗ ਬਾਰ ਵਿੱਚ ਵਿਊ ਸੈੱਟ ਕਰੋ ਅਤੇ ਹਰੇਕ ਵਿਊ ਨੂੰ ਉੱਥੇ ਕਨਫ਼ਿਗਰ ਕੀਤੀਆਂ ਆਪਣੀਆਂ ਸੈਟਿੰਗਾਂ ਦਿਓ।
- ਕਰਾਸ ਸੈਕਸ਼ਨ ਐਲੀਵੇਸ਼ਨ ਵਿੱਚ ਲੁਕੀਆਂ ਕਿਨਾਰਾਂ ਦਿਖਾਓਉਹ ਐਲੀਵੇਸ਼ਨ ਕਿਸਮ ਚੁਣੋ ਜੋ ਹਮੇਸ਼ਾ ਲੁਕੀਆਂ ਕਿਨਾਰਾਂ ਖਿੱਚਦੀ ਹੈ, ਤਾਂ ਜੋ ਕੈਬਿਨੇਟ ਕਟਾਈ ਵਿੱਚ ਬੈਕ ਪੈਨਲ ਵਰਗੇ ਹਿੱਸੇ ਦਿਖਾਈ ਦੇਣ।
- Start making a component from the floor planOpen the Components panel from the floor plan to create a new component or import one from a DWG, then select objects and set a base point.
- 2D ਫਲੋਰ ਪਲਾਨ ਅਤੇ 3D ਵਿਊ ਵਿਚਕਾਰ ਬਦਲੋ2D ਫਲੋਰ ਪਲਾਨ ਅਤੇ 3D ਵਿਊ ਵਿਚਕਾਰ ਬਦਲੋ ਅਤੇ ਦੇਖੋ ਕਿ ਸਟੇਟਸ ਬਾਰ ਅਤੇ ਪ੍ਰਾਪਰਟੀ ਪੈਨਲ ਕਿਵੇਂ ਪ੍ਰਤੀਕਿਰਿਆ ਕਰਦੇ ਹਨ।
- Switch the tracing background from Image to DWG FileSwitch the floor menu's Tracing Background from Image to DWG File so you can set an active DWG and use its layers, scale and position.
- ਨੈਵੀਗੇਸ਼ਨ ਬਾਰ ਤੋਂ ਫਲੋਰ ਪਲਾਨ, 3D ਅਤੇ ਐਲੀਵੇਸ਼ਨ ਟੌਗਲ ਕਰੋਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਵਰਕਸਪੇਸ ਦੇ ਸਿਖਰ 'ਤੇ ਨੈਵੀਗੇਸ਼ਨ ਬਾਰ ਦੀ ਵਰਤੋਂ ਫਲੋਰ ਪਲਾਨ, 3D ਅਤੇ ਐਲੀਵੇਸ਼ਨ ਵਿਚਕਾਰ ਬਦਲਣ ਅਤੇ ਲੈਵਲਾਂ ਵਿਚਕਾਰ ਜਾਣ ਲਈ ਕਰੋ।
- Understand dimension attachment circles and delete extra dimensionsClick a dimension to see a circle marking what it is attached to, and remove any extra dimensions you no longer need.
- Understand global layers in the designLearn what the global layers panel lists and what a layer controls.
- Understand the X, Y and Z axes in the design workspaceLearn which direction each axis runs in the design workspace.
- Understand why view-level edits stay in one viewLearn that changes made after unlocking a view apply only to that view, and that each named view keeps its own layer visibility.
- ਲੇਅਰ ਦਿੱਖ ਜਾਂ ਆਬਜੈਕਟ ਵਿਸ਼ੇਸ਼ਤਾਵਾਂ ਬਦਲਣ ਲਈ ਵਿਊ ਨੂੰ ਅਣਲਾਕ ਕਰੋਸੇਵ ਕੀਤੇ ਵਿਊ ਨੂੰ ਅਣਲਾਕ ਕਰੋ ਤਾਂ ਜੋ ਤੁਸੀਂ ਲੇਅਰ ਦਿੱਖ ਜਾਂ ਆਬਜੈਕਟ ਵਿਸ਼ੇਸ਼ਤਾਵਾਂ ਬਦਲ ਸਕੋ, ਫਿਰ ਇਸਨੂੰ ਦੁਬਾਰਾ ਲਾਕ ਕਰੋ।
- Use an external mouse for 3D navigation in the design viewportZoom in and out and orbit in 3D mode in the design viewport, with global preferences and settings at the bottom of the interface.
- Use AutoCAD-style drawing and editing tools in InfurniaDraw and edit with the same tools you know from AutoCAD, including line, three-point arc, rectangle, circle, polyline, trim, extend, offset, fillet, copy and mirror.
- Use copy and array to place multiple copies at fixed spacing or countPlace several copies of an item at a fixed spacing or count, or fall back to a single free copy per click.
- ਐਰੇ ਪਲੇਸਮੈਂਟ ਵਿੱਚ ਇੱਕ ਟੈਕਸਟ ਕਾਪੀ ਲਈ ਕਾਪੀ ਮੋਡ ਵਰਤੋਟੈਕਸਟ ਨੂੰ ਹਰ ਅੰਤਰਾਲ 'ਤੇ ਦੁਹਰਾਉਣ ਦੀ ਬਜਾਏ ਇਸਦੀ ਇੱਕ ਕਾਪੀ ਲੋੜੀਂਦੀ ਥਾਂ 'ਤੇ ਰੱਖੋ।
- Use ME E enter shortcut to measure in the designTake measurements in the design with the 'ME E enter' shortcut, for example to confirm a blind corner measurement.
- ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਵਿੱਚ ਜ਼ੂਮ, ਪੈਨ, ਚੋਣ ਅਤੇ ਆਰਬਿਟ ਲਈ ਮਾਊਸ ਕੰਟਰੋਲ ਵਰਤੋਜਾਣੋ ਕਿ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਇੰਟਰਫੇਸ ਵਿੱਚ ਕਿਹੜੀ ਮਾਊਸ ਕਿਰਿਆ ਜ਼ੂਮ, ਪੈਨ, ਚੋਣ ਅਤੇ ਆਰਬਿਟ ਕਰਦੀ ਹੈ।
- ਸੰਯੁਕਤ ਟੈਕਸਟ ਅਤੇ ਤੀਰ ਐਨੋਟੇਸ਼ਨਾਂ ਲਈ ਮਲਟੀਲੀਡਰ ਵਰਤੋਤੀਰ ਅਤੇ ਟੈਕਸਟ ਇਕੱਠੇ ਇੱਕ ਐਨੋਟੇਸ਼ਨ ਵਜੋਂ ਸ਼ਾਮਲ ਕਰੋ ਤਾਂ ਜੋ ਬਾਅਦ ਵਿੱਚ ਦੋਵੇਂ ਵਿਵਸਥਿਤ ਕੀਤੇ ਜਾ ਸਕਣ।
- Use the MV shortcut to move and place fillersPosition a filler or cabinet precisely by activating the move tool with the MV shortcut.
- ਕੰਸਟ੍ਰਕਸ਼ਨ ਲਾਈਨਾਂ ਲਈ XL ਅਤੇ ਦੂਰੀ 'ਤੇ ਕਾਪੀ ਕਰਨ ਲਈ CP ਵਰਤੋXL ਨਾਲ ਕੰਸਟ੍ਰਕਸ਼ਨ ਲਾਈਨਾਂ ਖਿੱਚੋ ਅਤੇ CP ਨਾਲ ਟਾਈਪ ਕੀਤੀ ਦੂਰੀ 'ਤੇ ਲਾਈਨ ਕਾਪੀ ਕਰੋ, ਤਾਂ ਜੋ ਤੁਹਾਨੂੰ ਹੱਥੀਂ ਮਾਪ ਨਾ ਲੈਣੇ ਪੈਣ।
- Use X-ray mode to select unitsEnter X-ray mode with the short form XR so you can select units.
- 3D ਵਰਕਸਪੇਸ ਵਿੱਚ ਜ਼ੂਮ, ਪੈਨ ਅਤੇ ਰੋਟੇਟ ਕਰੋਮਾਊਸ ਨਾਲ 3D ਵਰਕਸਪੇਸ ਵਿੱਚ ਘੁੰਮੋ ਤਾਂ ਜੋ ਤੁਸੀਂ ਆਪਣੇ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਨੂੰ ਕਿਸੇ ਵੀ ਕੋਣ ਤੋਂ ਵੇਖ ਸਕੋ।
- Zoom to fit ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਵਿਊ ਨੂੰ Shift+Z ਨਾਲਆਪਣੇ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਵਿੱਚ ਵਸਤੂਆਂ ਨਾਲ ਵਿਊ ਨੂੰ ਫਿੱਟ ਕਰਨ ਲਈ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਵਿਊ ਵਿੱਚ Shift+Z ਦਬਾਓ।
- Zoom to the selected item and centre it on the canvasPress Shift+X to zoom to the selected item and centre it on the canvas, and check the Keyboard Shortcuts list for the matching hotkeys.
ਟਾਈਲਿੰਗ, ਛੱਤਾਂ ਅਤੇ ਫਿਨਿਸ਼29
- Draw ceilings from the room corner with no wall gapAdd a ceiling by drawing a rectangle from the ceiling command menu, then add tiling the same way.
- Add tiling the same way as a ceilingAdd tiling exactly as you add a ceiling, then adjust its default thickness and pattern options such as 45-degree and 90-degree rotation.
- ਖੇਤਰ ਖਿੱਚ ਕੇ ਜਾਂ pick ਟੂਲ ਵਰਤ ਕੇ ਫ਼ਰਸ਼ ਦੀਆਂ ਟਾਈਲਾਂ ਲਗਾਓਖੇਤਰ ਖਿੱਚ ਕੇ ਜਾਂ pick ਟੂਲ ਨੂੰ ਕਮਰੇ ਦਾ ਕੇਂਦਰ ਲੱਭਣ ਦੇ ਕੇ ਕਮਰੇ ਵਿੱਚ ਫ਼ਰਸ਼ ਦੀਆਂ ਟਾਈਲਾਂ ਸ਼ਾਮਲ ਕਰੋ।
- Add a ceiling and tiling with the pick toolDraw a ceiling and tiling inside the room with the pick tool, then adjust the tiling pattern and size.
- Add wall tiles with tiling and cutting tool, extrude 12 mmAdd wall tiles to a wall by drawing a rectangular area, extruding it to 12 mm and choosing a wall tile material, then adjust the pattern and tile sizes.
- ਕੰਧ ਚੁਣ ਕੇ ਅਤੇ ਟਾਈਲਿੰਗ ਟੂਲ ਵਰਤ ਕੇ ਕੰਧ ਟਾਈਲਿੰਗ ਸ਼ਾਮਲ ਕਰੋਕੰਧ ਚੁਣ ਕੇ ਅਤੇ ਟਾਈਲਿੰਗ ਅਤੇ ਕੱਟਣ ਵਾਲੇ ਟੂਲ ਨਾਲ ਟਾਈਲ ਵਾਲਾ ਖੇਤਰ ਖਿੱਚ ਕੇ ਕੰਧ ਉੱਤੇ ਟਾਈਲਿੰਗ ਸ਼ਾਮਲ ਕਰੋ।
ਸਭ ਵੇਖੋ (29)
- Apply tiles and adjust tile size, grout colour and patternPick a surface, apply tiling, then choose the pattern, tile size and grout line colour.
- ਟਾਈਲਿੰਗ ਅਤੇ ਕੱਟਣ ਵਾਲੇ ਟੂਲ ਨਾਲ ਕੰਧ ਟਾਈਲ ਕਲੈਡਿੰਗ ਖੇਤਰ ਬਣਾਓਟਾਈਲਿੰਗ ਅਤੇ ਕੱਟਣ ਵਾਲੇ ਟੂਲ ਵਿੱਚ ਕਲੈਡਿੰਗ ਦੀ ਹੱਦ ਖਿੱਚ ਕੇ ਅਤੇ ਲਾਗੂ ਕਰਕੇ ਕੰਧ ਨੂੰ ਟਾਈਲਾਂ ਨਾਲ ਕਲੈਡ ਕਰੋ।
- Sweep Tool ਨਾਲ ਕਾਰਨਿਸ, ਮੋਲਡਿੰਗ ਅਤੇ ਵਾਲ ਪੈਨਲਿੰਗ ਸ਼ਾਮਲ ਕਰੋਕਸਟਮ ਕਾਰਨਿਸ, ਮੋਲਡਿੰਗ ਅਤੇ ਸਜਾਵਟੀ ਵਾਲ ਪੈਨਲਿੰਗ ਸ਼ਾਮਲ ਕਰਨ ਲਈ ਦੀਵਾਰਾਂ ਉੱਤੇ Sweep Tool ਵਰਤੋ, ਅਤੇ ਵਾਲ ਮੋਲਡਿੰਗ ਅਤੇ ਸ਼ਟਰ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਲਈ ਟਾਈਲਿੰਗ ਕਟਿੰਗ ਵਿੱਚ sweep mode ਵਰਤੋ।
- ਵਾਲ ਫਿਨਿਸ਼ ਮਟੀਰੀਅਲ ਰਾਹੀਂ ਵਾਲਪੇਪਰ ਜਾਂ ਪੇਂਟ ਸ਼ਾਮਲ ਕਰੋਕੰਧ ਦੇ ਫਿਨਿਸ਼ ਮਟੀਰੀਅਲ ਵਿਕਲਪਾਂ ਵਿੱਚੋਂ ਚੁਣ ਕੇ ਕੰਧ ਨੂੰ ਵਾਲਪੇਪਰ ਜਾਂ ਪੇਂਟ ਫਿਨਿਸ਼ ਦਿਓ।
- ਟਾਈਲਿੰਗ ਦੀ ਡੂੰਘਾਈ, ਪੈਟਰਨ, ਟਾਈਲ ਦਾ ਆਕਾਰ ਅਤੇ ਗਰਾਊਟਿੰਗ ਨੂੰ ਸਮਾਯੋਜਿਤ ਕਰੋਟਾਈਲਿੰਗ ਪੈਟਰਨ ਨੂੰ ਕਿਸੇ ਵੀ ਡਿਗਰੀ ਤੱਕ ਘੁਮਾਓ ਅਤੇ ਉਸੇ ਪੈਨਲ ਤੋਂ ਟਾਈਲ ਦਾ ਆਕਾਰ, ਗਰਾਊਟਿੰਗ ਲਾਈਨ ਅਤੇ ਗਰਾਊਟਿੰਗ ਰੰਗ ਬਦਲੋ।
- Apply ceiling tiling from the architecture menuSelect the pick tool, click inside the room and apply the ceiling to tile it.
- Build layered custom wall designs with tiling and fixed-distance copyCreate a custom wall design such as a rafter by building each layer from a rectangle with its own dimensions and extrude depth.
- Change ceiling tile pattern material and grouting line colourApply a tile as the ceiling pattern material and then change the colour of its grouting lines.
- ਫਰਸ਼ ਦੀ ਟਾਈਲਿੰਗ ਦੀਆਂ ਟਾਈਲਾਂ, ਪੈਟਰਨ ਅਤੇ ਗਰਾਊਟ ਬਦਲੋArchitecture > Add Tiling ਨਾਲ ਫਰਸ਼ ਦੀ ਟਾਈਲਿੰਗ ਖਿੱਚੋ, ਫਿਰ ਟਾਈਲਿੰਗ ਦੇ ਕੰਟਰੋਲਾਂ ਤੋਂ ਇਸਦਾ ਟਾਈਲ ਆਕਾਰ, ਪੈਟਰਨ ਅਤੇ ਗਰਾਊਟ ਲਾਈਨਾਂ ਵਿਵਸਥਿਤ ਕਰੋ।
- ਟਾਈਲ ਦਾ ਆਕਾਰ ਸੈੱਟ ਕਰਨ ਤੋਂ ਪਹਿਲਾਂ ਟਾਈਲ ਪੈਟਰਨ ਬਦਲੋਕਿਸੇ ਕਮਰੇ ਦੀ ਸਤ੍ਹਾ 'ਤੇ ਟਾਈਲਿੰਗ ਲਾਗੂ ਕਰੋ, ਪਹਿਲਾਂ ਟਾਈਲ ਲੇਆਉਟ ਚੁਣੋ, ਫਿਰ ਉਹ ਟਾਈਲ ਆਕਾਰ ਸੈੱਟ ਕਰੋ ਜੋ ਪੈਟਰਨ ਦੀ ਆਗਿਆ ਦਿੰਦਾ ਹੈ।
- ਟਾਈਲਿੰਗ ਵਿਸ਼ੇਸ਼ਤਾਵਾਂ ਤੋਂ ਟਾਈਲ ਪੈਟਰਨ, ਆਕਾਰ, ਗਰਾਊਟ ਅਤੇ ਸਮੱਗਰੀ ਬਦਲੋਲਾਗੂ ਕੀਤੇ ਫਰਸ਼ ਦੇ ਟਾਈਲਿੰਗ ਵਿਸ਼ੇਸ਼ਤਾਵਾਂ ਤੋਂ ਇਸ ਦਾ ਲੇਆਉਟ ਪੈਟਰਨ, ਟਾਈਲ ਦੇ ਮਾਪ, ਗਰਾਊਟ ਲਾਈਨਾਂ ਅਤੇ ਟਾਈਲ ਸਮੱਗਰੀ ਬਦਲੋ।
- Change tile size and material from the tile optionsSelect a tile to see its depth, then set its dimensions and apply a pattern or material at the scale you want.
- Change tiling material from flooring to wall tilesSwitch the material applied to a tiled surface from flooring tiles to wall tiles in the tiling pattern settings.
- ਟਾਈਲਿੰਗ ਵਿੱਚ ਲਾਈਨ ਟੂਲ ਨਾਲ ਖੁੱਲ੍ਹੇ ਸਿਰੇ ਵਾਲੀ ਹੱਦ ਨੂੰ ਪੂਰਾ ਕਰੋਖੁੱਲ੍ਹੇ ਸਿਰੇ ਵਾਲੇ ਡਰਾਫਟ ਕੀਤੇ ਖੇਤਰ ਨੂੰ ਟਾਈਲਿੰਗ ਫੰਕਸ਼ਨ ਵਿੱਚ ਲਾਈਨ ਟੂਲ ਨਾਲ ਉਸ ਦਾ ਗੁੰਮਿਆ ਕਿਨਾਰਾ ਖਿੱਚ ਕੇ ਬੰਦ ਕਰੋ, ਤਾਂ ਜੋ ਟਾਈਲਿੰਗ ਸਫਲ ਹੋ ਸਕੇ।
- Convert an extruded surface to tiling and set tile patternTurn a drawn surface from extrude into tiling, pick a pattern and tile size, and adjust the grout to finish.
- Create a ceiling or tiling from a closed room shapePick the shape tool, select a closed room shape, and apply it to create a ceiling or tiling.
- ਟਾਈਲਿੰਗ ਅਤੇ ਕੱਟਣ ਵਾਲੇ ਟੂਲ ਦੀ ਵਰਤੋਂ ਕਰਕੇ ਦੀਵਾਰ ਉੱਤੇ ਡੈਡੋ ਬਣਾਓਦੀਵਾਰ ਦੀ ਸਤ੍ਹਾ ਉੱਤੇ ਬੰਦ ਡੈਡੋ ਆਊਟਲਾਈਨ ਖਿੱਚੋ ਤਾਂ ਜੋ ਟਾਈਲਿੰਗ ਅਤੇ ਕੱਟਣ ਵਾਲਾ ਟੂਲ ਇਸਨੂੰ ਡੈਡੋ ਵਜੋਂ ਲਾਗੂ ਕਰੇ।
- 3D ਵਿੱਚ ਟਾਈਲਿੰਗ ਸ਼ਕਲ ਸੋਧੋ ਤਾਂ ਜੋ ਸੰਰੇਖਣ ਅਤੇ ਫਾਲਤੂ ਲਾਈਨਾਂ ਠੀਕ ਹੋਣ3D ਵਿੱਚ ਟਾਈਲਿੰਗ ਸੰਰੇਖਣ ਸੋਧੋ ਅਤੇ ਫਾਲਤੂ ਆਊਟਲਾਈਨ ਲਾਈਨਾਂ ਸਾਫ਼ ਕਰੋ ਤਾਂ ਜੋ ਟਾਈਲਿੰਗ ਤੁਹਾਡੀ ਲੋੜੀਂਦੀ ਸ਼ਕਲ ਦੀ ਪਾਲਣਾ ਕਰੇ।
- Enable grouting lines and adjust their appearanceTurn on grouting lines and then adjust their appearance, for example make them darker, to suit the design.
- Enable grouting lines and customize pattern sizesEnable grouting lines and customize pattern sizes for your tiles.
- ਸੱਜੇ-ਹੇਠਾਂ ਤੋਂ ਟਾਈਲਿੰਗ ਲੇਆਉਟ ਪਲਾਨ ਜਾਂ ਰਿਫਲੈਕਟਿਡ ਸੀਲਿੰਗ ਪਲਾਨ ਚਾਲੂ ਕਰੋਟਾਈਲਿੰਗ ਲੇਆਉਟ ਪਲਾਨ ਜਾਂ ਰਿਫਲੈਕਟਿਡ ਸੀਲਿੰਗ ਪਲਾਨ ਵਿਕਲਪ ਚਾਲੂ ਕਰੋ ਤਾਂ ਜੋ ਤੁਸੀਂ ਲਾਈਟਾਂ ਵਰਗੇ ਸੀਲਿੰਗ ਤੱਤ ਰੱਖ ਅਤੇ ਵਿਵਸਥਿਤ ਕਰ ਸਕੋ।
- Open the Tiling Pattern options for a selected tilingOpen the Tiling Pattern header in the Tiling Zone panel to reach rotation, pattern, tile size, grout line and material settings.
- ਟਾਈਲਿੰਗ ਅਤੇ ਕੱਟਣ ਵਾਲੇ ਟੂਲ ਵਿੱਚ extrude, cut ਅਤੇ front shift ਵਰਤੋਟਾਈਲਿੰਗ ਅਤੇ ਕੱਟਣ ਵਾਲੇ ਟੂਲ ਵਿੱਚ ਇੱਕ ਆਕਾਰ ਬਣਾਓ, ਫਿਰ ਇਸਨੂੰ extrude ਕਰੋ, ਕੰਧ ਵਿੱਚ cut ਕਰੋ ਜਾਂ ਇਸਨੂੰ front shift ਕਰੋ ਤਾਂ ਜੋ ਤੁਸੀਂ ਆਪਣਾ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਬਣਾ ਸਕੋ।
ਕੈਬਿਨੈਟ ਸੈਟਅੱਪ ਅਤੇ ਬਣਾਵਟ161
- ਕੈਬਿਨੈੱਟ ਦੀ ਬਣਾਵਟ, ਸਕਰਟਿੰਗ, ਕਾਊਂਟਰਟਾਪ ਅਤੇ ਕਾਰਕਾਸ ਪੈਨਲਾਂ ਨੂੰ ਕਸਟਮਾਈਜ਼ ਕਰੋਚੁਣੇ ਹੋਏ ਕੈਬਿਨੈੱਟ 'ਤੇ customize ਟੈਬ ਖੋਲ੍ਹੋ ਅਤੇ ਇਸ ਦੀ ਬਣਾਵਟ, ਸਕਰਟਿੰਗ, ਕਾਊਂਟਰਟਾਪ ਅਤੇ ਕਾਰਕਾਸ ਪੈਨਲ ਸੈੱਟ ਕਰੋ।
- ਕੈਬਿਨੈਟ ਦੇ ਡਿਫਾਲਟ ਨਿਰਮਾਣ ਪੈਰਾਮੀਟਰ ਜਾਂਚੋਜਾਣੋ ਕਿ Infurnia ਬੈਕ ਪੈਨਲ ਗਰੂਵਿੰਗ, ਸ਼ਟਰ ਰਿਡਕਸ਼ਨ, ਸ਼ੈਲਫ ਰਿਵੀਲ, ਬੈਕ ਪੈਨਲ ਆਫਸੈੱਟ ਅਤੇ ਬੇਸ ਕੈਬਿਨੈਟ ਟਾਪ ਲਈ ਕਿਹੜੇ ਡਿਫਾਲਟ ਮੁੱਲ ਵਰਤਦਾ ਹੈ।
- ਯੂਨਿਟਾਂ ਵਿੱਚ ਸਕਰਟਿੰਗ ਜੋੜੋ ਅਤੇ ਇਸਨੂੰ ਸੱਜੇ ਪਾਸਿਆਂ ਉੱਤੇ ਦਿਖਾਓਗੈਰ-ਲੱਕੜੀ ਸਕਰਟਿੰਗ ਚਾਲੂ ਕਰੋ, ਕਾਰਕਸ ਦੀ ਉਚਾਈ ਸਹੀ ਸੈੱਟ ਕਰੋ ਅਤੇ ਹਰ ਪਾਸੇ ਲਈ ਸਕਰਟਿੰਗ ਦੀ ਦਿੱਖ ਚਾਲੂ ਕਰੋ।
- ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਵਿੱਚ ਕੈਬਿਨੈੱਟ ਦੇ ਪਿਛਲੇ, ਉੱਪਰਲੇ, ਹੇਠਲੇ ਅਤੇ ਪਾਸਿਆਂ ਦੇ ਪੈਨਲ ਕਨਫਿਗਰ ਕਰੋਹਰ ਕੈਬਿਨੈੱਟ ਪੈਨਲ ਨੂੰ ਵੱਖਰੇ ਤੌਰ 'ਤੇ ਕਨਫਿਗਰ ਕਰੋ ਤਾਂ ਜੋ ਇਸ ਦਾ ਆਕਾਰ, ਸਮੱਗਰੀ, ਐਜ ਬੈਂਡ, ਲਾਈਟਿੰਗ ਅਤੇ ਹਾਰਡਵੇਅਰ ਤੁਹਾਡੀ ਲੋੜੀਂਦੀ ਬਣਾਵਟ ਨਾਲ ਮੇਲ ਖਾਵੇ।
- Configure skirting, carcass panels and offsets in Construction tabSet how skirting, carcass panels and back panel offsets appear in the Construction tab so your cabinet's manufacturing output matches the design.
- Reference panel thickness in cabinet construction formulasReference a panel's thickness in a construction formula by picking the thickness parameter from the suggestions instead of typing raw numbers.
ਸਭ ਵੇਖੋ (161)
- Compare wardrobe and kitchen cabinet heightsSee how wardrobe height includes the skirting while kitchen cabinet height is the carcass box alone.
- Copy and paste a cabinet to create similar cabinets quicklyFully adjust one cabinet first, then copy and paste it to create multiple similar cabinets faster than adjusting each one individually.
- Understand how cabinets and drawer channels appear in the Pricing QuotationLearn how Base Unit, Wall Unit and Tall Unit cabinets are labelled and listed, and how a drawer's channel is counted and priced in the quotation.
- Create an open corner unit by removing the shuttersPlace a standard corner unit, remove its shutters to make it open, and save the result for reuse.
- How back panel extension uses a 10 mm offsetLearn how the back panel extension is built with a 10 mm offset.
- Apply construction styles to cabinets and corner unitsLearn that construction styles are defined separately for cabinets and for corner units.
- Configure a shutter system's handles, profiles, colours and glassChoose the handle type, profile, colour and glass options for a cabinet shutter system, knowing the system setting stays separate from per-shutter edits.
- Create a kitchen layout by placing one unit then copying and aligningPlace one wall unit or loft in the correct position, then copy and align the remaining units to build your kitchen layout.
- How kitchen cabinet skirting affects total unit heightLearn how the roughly 100 mm skirting on a kitchen cabinet adds to the carcass height shown in the dimensions to give the total unit height.
- How Minifix and dowel placement is automatedLearn what drives the automatic placement of Minifix and dowels in a carcass.
- How wall unit height is calculatedLearn what the sum of tiling, skirting, cabinet and granite thickness actually measures and where a wall unit's height from the floor comes from.
- Move cabinets in 2D and 3D viewsMove a cabinet up and down and reposition it in either the 2D view or the 3D view.
- Understand corner unit depthLearn that the depth of a corner unit is the box depth excluding the shutter.
- Understand L-corner unit dimensions and shutter optionsLearn how the Front Back, Side Back, Side Left and Side Right dimensions map to an L-corner unit's faces and which shutter systems it offers.
- Apply construction and manufacturing settings via bulk edit structureApply construction and manufacturing configuration settings to cabinets and wardrobes using the bulk edit structure option.
- Apply sliding and corner shutter mechanisms correctlyPlace sliding shutters only on the outer partition and pick a mechanism the corner shape supports.
- Change cabinet size and understand material categoriesResize a cabinet from the properties panel and learn how its materials are grouped.
- Convert a shutter cabinet to drawers and baskets by editing the systemTurn a single-shutter cabinet into a wicker basket and drawer unit by removing the shutter and customizing the system, then add, remove and adjust drawers and partitions.
- How kitchen tall unit height and depth are measuredLearn which parts of a kitchen tall unit are left out when its height and depth are measured.
- Add a custom construction unit from the catalogue warehouse to a designBring a warehouse base unit into your catalogue so it appears under furnish in the design portal.
- Add a lock to a cabinet panelAdd the lock to the panel in the design and reduce the panel size by 30 mm to accommodate it.
- Combine two cabinets into a single user componentCombine two separate cabinets into one user component that behaves as a single unit.
- Extend a cabinet end panel to the floor or ceilingExtend an end panel added from a cabinet's End Panel section downward to the floor or upward from its own panel using the Width Extension values.
- Extend panels to the floor using construction settings and formulasExtend a visible panel to the ground through its construction settings and drive panel sizes with formulas so they adjust automatically.
- How cabinet material properties are setA cabinet's material properties are set through several separate fields, and the shutter external finish is typically chosen separately from the rest.
- How cabinet module width, height and depth ranges are enforcedLearn how each cabinet module's sizing rule sets minimum and maximum width, height and depth and keeps designers within those limits.
- Remove the skirting from a unitSwitch off the front skirting under Skirting Visibility so the unit no longer shows skirting at the front.
- Set drawer side reductions and fascia extensions in a drawer unitAdjust a drawer's own panel reductions and extensions to resize and reshape its fascia in a 3 Drawer Unit.
- Understand center cabinet side panel constructionLearn how center cabinet side panels are built by default and how the left, right, top and bottom panels fit together.
- Understand corner unit shapes and their construction optionsSee which corner unit shapes exist and how curved fronts, back panel offset and hanging rods behave.
- Understand kitchen cabinet height in the quick access panelLearn what the height in a kitchen cabinet's quick access panel measures and what editing it changes.
- Understand the kitchen base corner unit top panelLearn that a kitchen base corner unit uses a full top panel.
- Add a standard wardrobe internal configuration with one clickAdd a standard configuration such as a bottom drawer to a wardrobe with a single click instead of building it manually.
- Add a vertical partition and set its widthSplit a cabinet space with a vertical partition and size it by ratio or by explicit widths.
- Add cabinets using FR enter and room templatesOpen the cabinet library with FR and enter, then place, rotate, resize and duplicate base or wall units.
- Configure wardrobe structure with Carcass panel constructionUse the Carcass panel construction section to configure wardrobe structure and add internal and external components such as vertical panels and drawers.
- Convert a carcass panel into rails and set rail depthTurn a selected carcass panel such as the top or back into rails and control how deep those rails are.
- Fix a cabinet width that is outside the allowed limitsEnter a cabinet width within the allowed limits so the system stops showing an error that the construction is invalid.
- How linked cores, postlam thickness and drill parameters workLearn how a linked back panel core overrides the carcass back core, how laminates add to panel thickness, and where connector drill sizes come from.
- How standard base unit dimensions workLearn the standard base unit depth and height used in kitchen modelling and what those measurements leave out.
- How wardrobe construction style stores carcass parametersLearn which carcass parameters a wardrobe unit construction style holds and how updating the style applies them to the wardrobe.
- Manage and edit existing cabinet items in the admin portalManage and edit existing cabinet items in the admin portal.
- Open and preset design preferences for cabinets and wardrobesReach the design's preference screens and decide whether to set cabinet and wardrobe defaults per project or once at admin level.
- Place dresser, TV and tall units from the furniture model libraryPlace dresser, TV and tall units using pre-built models or your own design, then adjust them to fit.
- Repurpose a cabinet into another unit typeEdit a cabinet's construction to turn it into a study table or TV unit and build the storage you need.
- See an element's properties in the properties panelSelect any element in a design to see its properties in the properties panel, including wall, door and window specifics.
- Set shelf and partition edge visibility in wardrobe preferencesSet the front/carcass visible edge band to carcass invisible for fixed shelves, adjustable shelves and vertical partition panels in Cabinet Preference / Wardrobe Preference.
- Split a partition into child partitionsAdd vertical panels or shelves to split a parent partition and edit each child side separately.
- Understand how inset and outset carcass edges change panel sizesLearn how each per-edge construction choice decides which panel covers the other's end and resizes both panels.
- Use multi-purpose model furniture for box frames instead of manual panelsPlace a unit that already includes its frame box and adjust the box depth by editing the depth value.
- Use the selection tree to reach cabinet, partition, shutter and panel controlsSelect a cabinet part to expose the levels above it and jump straight to the controls you need.
- Build a TV unit from modular base, wall and open unitsOpen the Furnish panel, choose multi-purpose modular furniture, and combine, rotate and position units to compose a TV unit.
- Bulk change unit width, depth and height from base unitsSelect the base units and edit the width, depth and height values to change their dimensions in bulk.
- Cabinet properties panel tabsLearn how the cabinet properties panel is organised into quick access, customize and construction tabs.
- Calculate carcass width from overall cabinet widthWork out the carcass width by taking the overall cabinet width and subtracting twice the carcass panel thickness.
- Change the default internal depth of 500 mm for drawersLearn how the suggested 500 mm internal depth for drawers is set and how to override it to the depth you need.
- Change the structure of multiple wall units at onceSelect all wall units except the corner units, then use the bulk action and choose bulk structure to change them together.
- Change wardrobe shutter material, edge band, handle and placement in propertiesSelect a wardrobe and change its shutter materials and finishes, edge bands, handles and handle placement from the properties panel.
- Choose corner unit type when creating a corner-unit construction styleSet the unit type to corner unit in the construction style settings so the style applies to corner units rather than standard units.
- Choose the right preference group for the unit type you placePick the preference group that matches the unit type being placed so base units, wall units, lofts and multi-purpose units use cabinet preferences and wardrobes use wardrobe preferences.
- Configure blind corner units as right-hand or left-handSet a blind corner unit to the right-hand or left-hand side option so it is configured correctly.
- Edit and customise cabinets in the designAdjust standard cabinet elements such as double shelves so modules fit your design instead of staying as supplied.
- Edit cabinet components in the design moduleChange the finishes, materials, skirting and internal finishes of a single cabinet from the properties tab, quick access, customize, the construction tab or the selection tree.
- Extend a wardrobe beyond 900 mmRemove the width cap so a wardrobe or cabinet can be widened past a fixed limit such as 900 mm.
- Find catalogue items by marked room typeMark a room type so the catalogue lists everything related to it under the matching furniture and accessories categories, making items easier to search and place.
- Hang wall cabinets with wall cabinet hanging bracketsUse wall cabinet hanging brackets from the hardware warehouse to hang wall cabinets.
- ਇੱਕ ਕੈਬਿਨੇਟ ਨੂੰ ਪੱਧਰਾਂ ਵਿੱਚ ਕਿਵੇਂ ਸੰਗਠਿਤ ਕੀਤਾ ਜਾਂਦਾ ਹੈਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਮੌਡਿਊਲ ਵਿੱਚ ਇੱਕ ਕੈਬਿਨੇਟ ਕੈਬਿਨੇਟ, ਪਾਰਟੀਸ਼ਨ, ਸ਼ਟਰ ਸਿਸਟਮ ਅਤੇ ਪੈਨਲ ਪੱਧਰਾਂ ਤੋਂ ਬਣਿਆ ਹੁੰਦਾ ਹੈ, ਅਤੇ ਹਰ ਪੱਧਰ ਦੀਆਂ ਆਪਣੀਆਂ ਸੈਟਿੰਗਾਂ ਹੁੰਦੀਆਂ ਹਨ।
- How a tandem drawer's panel sizes are calculatedLearn how a tandem drawer's bottom and back panel depths and heights are derived from the tandem item's dimensions.
- How cabinets above 1800 mm are treated as loft unitsLearn how the Auto Presentation template's minimum elevation and Loft detection switch decide whether a cabinet above 1800 mm counts as a loft unit.
- How countertops affect displayed base unit heightLearn why adding or removing a countertop on a base unit never changes the carcass height shown for that unit.
- How minimum and maximum cabinet size limits workLearn how minimum and maximum size limits apply to a cabinet's width, height and depth and where they are configured.
- How panel dimensions are driven by extensions and cabinet adjustmentsLearn how a panel's total thickness is calculated from its core and finishes, and how that calculation differs for pre-laminated and post-laminated core materials.
- How wardrobe back panel grooving follows construction settingsLearn how the back panel extension values from the wardrobe SKU and design preferences set how far back panels run into the surrounding panels.
- Open construction styles from admin preference settingsOpen admin preference settings and go to construction styles to set up construction styles.
- Place wall units and tall units from the kitchen furniture libraryPlace a wall or tall unit from the kitchen furniture library and adjust its dimensions, using the same placement options as other cabinet types.
- Rotate a cabinet before or after placing itPlace a cabinet from the furnish tool and rotate it with the space bar before placing or with the rotate option afterwards.
- Set cabinet preferences per project or as admin defaultSet the default cabinet settings a new project starts with, split into carcass, shutter and handle.
- Set carcass and back-panel core material defaults before placing cabinetsChoose the carcass core and back-panel core materials in the cabinet-level preference so new cabinets pick them up.
- ਸਾਈਜ਼ਿੰਗ ਨਿਯਮਾਂ ਰਾਹੀਂ ਕੈਬਿਨੈਟ ਦੇ ਘੱਟੋ-ਘੱਟ ਅਤੇ ਵੱਧ ਤੋਂ ਵੱਧ ਆਕਾਰ ਦੀਆਂ ਸੀਮਾਵਾਂ ਸੈੱਟ ਕਰੋਸਰੋਤ ਮਾਡਲ ਅਤੇ ਐਡਮਿਨ ਪੋਰਟਲ ਵਿੱਚ ਸਾਈਜ਼ਿੰਗ ਨਿਯਮ ਕਨਫਿਗਰ ਕਰੋ ਤਾਂ ਜੋ ਕੈਬਿਨੈਟ ਦੇ ਮਾਪ ਮਨਜ਼ੂਰ ਸੀਮਾਵਾਂ ਤੋਂ ਵੱਧ ਨਾ ਜਾ ਸਕਣ।
- Set or change a hob's sizeChoose a hob size preset in the catalogue or adjust the height, width and depth of a placed hob to match what the customer selected.
- Set sizing rules on cabinet or partition for outer and inner limitsChoose whether a unit's limits apply to its outer dimensions or its internal clear space, and apply them one unit at a time or in bulk.
- Set the carcass railing option for the top panelSet the carcass railing option so the top panel is a rail panel or a full panel, and adjust construction per side to match the required design.
- Size the top panel for gola and G-profile cabinetsLearn how the gola profile offsets the top panel toward the back while a G-profile keeps it at carcass size.
- Switch catalogue categories with the carouselUse the carousel to see the current furniture category and move between categories such as base unit, wall unit, tall unit, fillers and loft.
- Understand end panels and side panels as separate panel typesLearn how a cabinet's side panels and end panels are distinct panel types with their own extension settings.
- Use carcass panel thickness formula to auto-adjust internal dimensionsEnter a formula based on carcass panel thickness instead of a manually calculated internal dimension, and let the system adjust the internal space to the correct value.
- Add base, wall, tall and loft fillers from the kitchen fillers libraryPlace base, wall unit, wall, tall unit and loft fillers in your kitchen design the same way you place cabinets.
- Add beams via custom construction with height and depthAdd beams through custom construction with height and depth, while other components such as lofts, wardrobes, cabinets and kitchen elements come directly from the catalog.
- Add kitchen units from Furnish panel dropdownsAdd base, sink, drawer, tall/appliance and filler units to your kitchen plan from the Furnish panel dropdowns.
- Add or change a back panel on an appliance unitAppliance units come with an open back by default so heat can radiate, and you can add or change a closed or coloured back panel in the open part of the construction.
- Add props at partition level so they move with the cabinetAdd props at partition level so they travel with the cabinet, then fine-tune their position in the furniture layer with X, Y and Z offsets.
- Add props to cabinets via partition-level customizationAdd bags, suitcases, storage boxes and other props to a cabinet by customizing a partition.
- Build an L-shaped beam unit in a wardrobeSet the wardrobe's overall height, width and depth at wardrobe level before building the L-shaped beam unit.
- Build cabinet units by dividing with shelves and vertical panelsDivide a cabinet unit with shelves and vertical panels, then adjust the section heights afterwards.
- Bulk edit structure on owned cabinets, not library itemsBulk structure edit only works on owned cabinets and wardrobes, so copy a library item into your own folder before changing its construction.
- Change carcass sizes to update manufacturing outputsChange carcass sizes as required and the manufacturing outputs update automatically.
- Change default carcass sizesChange the default carcass sizes to match your own requirements and let the manufacturing outputs update automatically.
- Change default construction values to client standardsChange the stored standard defaults so construction values match a client's own construction standards.
- Change the handle type on library furnitureChange the handle type on furniture you added from the library so it no longer keeps the default surface handle.
- Choose a kitchen cabinet typeLearn which cabinet types the kitchen module offers for your design.
- Choose between Quick Access, Customize and ConstructionPick the cabinet customization menu that matches the change you want to make, whether it is a regular change or adding elements.
- Choose custom and kitchen filler panel typesLearn which custom panel shapes and kitchen filler panel types you can add to a design.
- ਅਲਮਾਰੀ ਲਈ ਸਹੀ ਖੱਬਾ ਜਾਂ ਸੱਜਾ ਸਿਰੇ ਦਾ ਪੈਨਲ ਚੁਣੋਅਲਮਾਰੀ ਵਿੱਚ ਖੱਬਾ ਜਾਂ ਸੱਜਾ ਸਿਰੇ ਦਾ ਪੈਨਲ ਜੋੜੋ, ਇਹ ਜਾਣਦੇ ਹੋਏ ਕਿ ਪਾਸਾ ਯੂਨਿਟ ਦੇ ਸ਼ਟਰਾਂ ਵੱਲ ਮੂੰਹ ਕਰਕੇ ਤੈਅ ਹੁੰਦਾ ਹੈ।
- Convert a modular unit to a user component via common modular unit actionsSelect several standard modular units together and turn them into one reusable user component.
- Customize cabinets through the selection treeUse the selection tree and its icons to customize a cabinet however you want.
- Drive panel and shutter dimensions with parametric valuesGive panel and shutter dimensions a parametric value so they resize automatically when the driving measurement changes.
- Edit an existing cabinet SKU in the component editorOpen an existing cabinet SKU with the edit SKU action so its saved construction loads in the component editor ready to adjust.
- Edit countertop and XYZ position from Quick AccessUse the Quick Access position controls to move a unit horizontally with X and Z and vertically with Y, while cabinet and shutter removal and constructional changes stay in the customize and construction options.
- Edit sink dimensions from the furniture light unitChange a sink's height, width and depth by selecting it and opening the furniture light unit in the selection tree.
- Enter dimensions in the right order for appliances and unitsLearn which dimension order applies to appliances and which to units so you enter each measurement in the right field.
- Find the cabinet editing tabs and selection treeLocate the Quick Access, Customize and Construction tabs and the selection tree you use to edit a cabinet.
- Find the quick access, customization and construction tabsLearn what the three interface tabs are for so you can move between quick access, customization and construction.
- Find the sizing and shelf limits of an L-corner unitOpen an L-corner unit's Customize > Rules to see its Sizing Rules and Shelf Restriction tabs, where Available Space holds Min and Max depth, width and height.
- Find your org's default design preferencesOpen Manage Org Preferences from the admin portal to see your org's default design preferences, grouped by category and split across Design, Production and Design MES tabs.
- How appliance sizes affect carcass constructionLearn how carcass panel sizes are computed and how choosing an appliance adjusts the partition to fit it.
- How cabinets outside a room are treatedLearn how cabinets whose maximum portion lies outside the room boundary are handled by room-assignment logic.
- How construction values come from account defaultsSkirting and other construction values are populated from your account's default settings.
- How minimum and maximum depth rules size a unitLearn how minimum depth and maximum depth set the allowed range for a unit's depth, and what happens when neither is set.
- How tall and mid units are defined by heightLearn how tall units are standardised from about 1500 mm up to 2400 mm including the skirting, and that units below that range are mid units.
- Identify and edit a selected cabinet in the selection treeSelect a cabinet to see its unit type and change properties such as width, depth, height, finishes, core material and edge banding.
- Insert a base or wall unit from the toolbar insert menuAdd a cabinet to the design view by picking a base or wall unit from the toolbar insert menu and placing it in the room.
- Insert base units and position them using dimension offsetsPlace base kitchen units, align them to a wall with a dimension offset, adjust their width and set their finishes, core material and edge banding.
- Let standard fittings auto-adjust on height or depth changeChange a unit's height or depth and let the software automatically adjust standard fittings such as hinges, minifix and shelves.
- Make components resize automatically with the cabinetSet the right parameters on a component so it resizes automatically when its parent cabinet or bed changes size.
- Manage default unit placement in preferencesSet default unit placement in the preferences menu so upcoming units and pre-made modular or semi-modular units and extension parameters follow your defaults.
- Open Global Preferences and find a settingOpen the Preferences panel from Global Preferences & Settings and search for the property you want to change.
- Override cabinet dimensions with negative valuesOverride cabinet dimensions such as depth or height by entering negative values when you have access to the sizing rules.
- Place a custom panel in a cabinetAdd a custom panel from the catalogue or with Add Custom Panel, follow the dashed outline and click to commit it.
- Place cabinets without pressing Furnish each timeSelect a cabinet type and its placement options open automatically so you can place it directly, then pick another type to keep placing cabinets.
- Place units by dragging or with the move toolPlace a unit in front of the carcass by dragging it or by using the move (MV) tool once the carcass dimensions are correct.
- Position a loft above wall cabinets using the Y-axisSet the loft's Y-axis to the wall cabinet's Y-axis plus 600 mm so the loft sits correctly above the wall units.
- Replicate customized units by editing modular base unitsStart from a modular furniture base unit and edit it into the customized unit you need.
- Reuse kitchen wall blind corner units in loft designsUse blind corner units from under kitchen wall units in loft designs and hide the panels you do not want there.
- Select all wardrobes together to set total heightSelect all wardrobe units together and update the total height value to set the wardrobe's total height.
- Set cabinet parameters so parametric resizing worksSet each panel's position parameters correctly while creating the cabinet so it can resize parametrically.
- Set cabinet X and Y position values with Z auto-generatedSet only the X and Y position values for a cabinet, where Y is the height from the floor, and let Z be generated automatically.
- Set carcass panel thickness and extend fillers to match itMatch your fillers to the 18 mm carcass panel thickness so they line up flush with the carcass.
- Set default shelf count and height limits via designer input rulesDefine designer input rules in preferences and settings so cabinet heights are checked against a min and max range automatically.
- Set internal finish and profile handles on cabinetsConfigure the internal finish on the left side of the cabinet and choose a profile system with its handle sides and colours.
- Set min/max width rules for double and triple sliding wardrobesConfigure width limits as rules on sliding wardrobe types so users can still choose any size within the allowed range.
- Set mounting height and skirting preferences for new unitsUse elevation and skirting visibility preferences so new units start at the right height with the right skirting shown.
- Set shelf reveal and back panel grooving values as presetsConfigure shelf reveal and back panel grooving values as presets in your account so you do not have to change them repeatedly for each design.
- Set sliding wardrobe depth at the wardrobe levelSet the depth for a sliding wardrobe once at the wardrobe level rather than panel by panel.
- Understand an L-corner unit's dimensions and arm changesLearn which dimensions a placed L-corner unit reports and what happens to its arms and cutouts when you change them.
- Understand cabinet customization levelsLearn how cabinet customization is organized into five levels, from changes that affect the whole cabinet down to individual panels.
- Understand cabinet, wardrobe and custom panel categoriesLearn how Infurnia organises units into three distinct categories: cabinet, wardrobe and custom panel.
- Understand component origin relative to the parent cabinetLearn that a custom panel or component's XYZ origin is relative to its cabinet, not the entire drawing.
- Understand corner unit panel headings and quotation categoriesLearn how a corner unit's panel heading and details differ from other Base Unit, Wall Unit and Tall Unit products and how it appears in the Pricing Quotation.
- Understand frame loft and box loft as kitchen furniture entitiesLearn how kitchen lofts appear as separate entities in the kitchen furniture dropdown and which two variants exist.
- Understand how Infernia treats modular units as BIMLearn how Infernia understands every part of a modular unit such as a cabinet or wardrobe, so shelves can be added or moved.
- Understand how unit width changes are appliedLearn which side of a unit grows or shrinks when you change its width in Infurnia.
- Understand what a carcass is in a cabinetLearn which panels make up a carcass and how it can be modified to build any cabinet type.
- Understand what gets stamped onto a unit when it is addedLearn which materials, finishes, edgebands and settings are applied at insertion and which preference set each unit type reads.
- ਕੋਣ ਵਾਲੀਆਂ ਕੈਬਿਨੈਟ ਸ਼ਕਲਾਂ ਲਈ ਕਸਟਮ ਪੈਨਲ ਵਰਤੋਮਿਆਰੀ ਕੈਬਿਨੈਟ ਪੈਨਲ ਨੂੰ ਘੁਮਾਉਣ ਦੀ ਬਜਾਏ ਵੱਖਰਾ ਕਸਟਮ ਪੈਨਲ ਵਰਤ ਕੇ ਕੋਣ ਵਾਲੀਆਂ ਜਾਂ ਗੈਰ-ਮਿਆਰੀ ਕੈਬਿਨੈਟ ਸ਼ਕਲਾਂ ਬਣਾਓ।
- Use one cabinet model for any custom sizePlace a single saved cabinet model and enter custom dimensions for non-standard sizes instead of creating a new module for each size.
ਕੈਬਿਨੈਟ ਸਮੱਗਰੀਆਂ ਅਤੇ ਫਿਨਿਸ਼81
- Understand how prelam and postlam core boards lock finish sidesLearn how a core board SKU's lamination type decides which panel finishes you can edit and which are bundled from the catalog.
- ਕੈਬਿਨੈੱਟ-ਪੱਧਰ ਦੇ ਸ਼ਟਰ ਅਤੇ ਕਾਰਕਾਸ ਫਿਨਿਸ਼ ਸੈੱਟ ਕਰੋਯੂਨਿਟ ਚੁਣਨ ਤੋਂ ਬਾਅਦ ਪ੍ਰਾਪਰਟੀਜ਼ ਪੈਨਲ ਤੋਂ ਸ਼ਟਰ ਅਤੇ ਕਾਰਕਾਸ ਫਿਨਿਸ਼ ਅਤੇ ਕੋਰ ਮਟੀਰੀਅਲ ਸੰਪਾਦਿਤ ਕਰੋ।
- ਕੈਬਿਨੈੱਟ ਪੈਨਲ ਸਮੱਗਰੀਆਂ ਅਤੇ ਲਿੰਕ ਕੀਤੇ ਫਿਨਿਸ਼ਾਂ ਨੂੰ ਸਮਝੋਦੇਖੋ ਕਿ ਕੈਬਿਨੈੱਟ ਦੇ Materials ਹੇਠਾਂ ਹਰ ਸਬ-ਟੈਬ ਵਿੱਚ ਕੀ ਹੈ ਅਤੇ ਲਿੰਕ ਕੀਤੇ ਫਿਨਿਸ਼ ਅਤੇ ਪ੍ਰੋਫਾਈਲ ਕਿਵੇਂ ਐਜ ਬੈਂਡ ਅਤੇ ਫਿਨਿਸ਼ ਆਪਣੇ ਆਪ ਬਦਲਦੇ ਹਨ।
- ਸ਼ਟਰ ਦੀ ਕੋਰ ਸਮੱਗਰੀ ਨੂੰ ਕੱਚ ਵਿੱਚ ਬਦਲੋਸ਼ਟਰ ਪੈਨਲ ਦੀ ਕੋਰ ਸਮੱਗਰੀ ਦਾ ਸਰੋਤ custom ਤੇ ਸੈੱਟ ਕਰੋ ਅਤੇ ਕੱਚ ਦੀ ਸਮੱਗਰੀ ਚੁਣੋ।
- ਕਈ ਯੂਨਿਟਾਂ ਦੇ ਸਮੱਗਰੀ ਇੱਕੋ ਵਾਰ ਬਦਲੋਹਰ ਇੱਕ ਨੂੰ ਸੋਧਣ ਦੀ ਬਜਾਏ, ਚੁਣੀਆਂ ਹੋਈਆਂ ਕਈ ਯੂਨਿਟਾਂ 'ਤੇ ਇੱਕੋ ਵਾਰ ਨਵੀਂ ਕੋਰ ਸਮੱਗਰੀ ਜਾਂ ਫਿਨਿਸ਼ ਲਾਗੂ ਕਰੋ।
- ਐਡਮਿਨ ਟੈਬ ਰਾਹੀਂ ਕੈਬਿਨੈਟ ਦਾ ਕੋਰ ਮਟੀਰੀਅਲ ਬਦਲੋਐਡਮਿਨ ਟੈਬ ਤੋਂ ਕੈਬਿਨੈਟ ਜਾਂ ਕੋਨਰ ਯੂਨਿਟ ਦਾ ਕੋਰ ਮਟੀਰੀਅਲ ਅੱਪਡੇਟ ਕਰੋ ਅਤੇ ਸੈਟਿੰਗਾਂ ਦੀ ਪੁਸ਼ਟੀ ਕਰੋ ਤਾਂ ਜੋ ਬਦਲਾਅ ਚੁਣੀ ਯੂਨਿਟ 'ਤੇ ਲਾਗੂ ਹੋਵੇ।
ਸਭ ਵੇਖੋ (81)
- ਇੱਕ ਕੈਬਿਨੈੱਟ ਲਈ ਕਾਰਕਾਸ ਫਿਨਿਸ਼ ਬਦਲੋਚੁਣੇ ਹੋਏ ਕੈਬਿਨੈੱਟ ਦੇ ਸਾਰੇ ਕਾਰਕਾਸ ਪੈਨਲ ਇਕੱਠੇ ਅੱਪਡੇਟ ਕਰਨ ਲਈ ਕੈਬਿਨੈੱਟ ਪੱਧਰ 'ਤੇ ਕਾਰਕਾਸ ਫਿਨਿਸ਼ ਬਦਲੋ, ਬਿਨਾਂ ਉਸੇ ਕਿਸਮ ਦੇ ਹੋਰ ਕੈਬਿਨੈੱਟਾਂ ਨੂੰ ਪ੍ਰਭਾਵਿਤ ਕੀਤੇ।
- Change cabinet finishes, core materials and edgebands via Change MaterialsChange a cabinet's finishes and core materials first, then its edgebands, using Change Materials.
- Configure shutter and carcass material thickness and finishes separatelySet the core material and finish for the carcass and the shutter independently so each component carries its own selection.
- Match edge bands and choose custom finishesSet visible edge bands to match the door panel and reserve custom finish for a contrasting colour.
- Change core material and thickness from the carousel and applyPick a core material and its thickness from the carousel and apply the change to your unit.
- Set shutter and carcass core material and thicknessChoose a core material such as BWP, BW or HDMR for shutters and carcasses and give each a thickness, with the back panel defaulting to 6 mm standard material.
- Apply a finish to multiple cabinet parts using the dropdown reuse optionChange a cabinet's finish from the library, then reuse that same finish on other parts like carcass external and carcass internal through the dropdown.
- Change door model, finish and handlePick a door model from the carousel, then set its finish and handle from meshes and materials.
- Change shutter colour at cabinet level and panel finish at panel levelSet the shutter colour for a whole cabinet and the external finish for an individual panel.
- How default finishes and design-level preferences override admin defaultsLearn how freshly added units take their finish from global preferences and why a design's own finish wins.
- Set shutter laminate sides and profile coloursApply shutter laminate to chosen sides and give non-handle profiles a colour.
- Update units that kept old materials after a preference changeBring already-placed cabinets up to date by re-applying shutter, carcass and back-panel core materials.
- Use custom finish and match property to copy a finish onto a panelApply a specific finish to a panel whose external finish is source-driven by selecting the panel, opening external finish source and choosing custom finish.
- Change one panel's material without affecting the unitUnlock a panel property from its source and set a different material on that panel only.
- How shutter colour and per-area colours combine on panelsLearn how the shutter colour sets the base colour of a multi-area panel while areas given their own colour keep it.
- Select a cabinet to open finish and edge-band settingsSelect a cabinet to open its properties panel, then set its finishes, back panel core and edge bands under Materials.
- Change countertop and cabinet material using laminate solidsConfirm the material change by modifying the countertop and applying the changes.
- Change handles and materials for multiple units at onceSelect several units together and swap their finishes in a single action with the change material / interchange control.
- How the back panel material is set and changedLearn how the back panel material defaults to a 6 mm standard board and how to change it when a different thickness or material is required.
- Set finishes and shelf options on a cabinet panel's own levelOpen a cabinet panel's own level to choose where its external and internal finishes come from, pick a custom finish for that panel alone, and set a shelf's type and visibility.
- Apply an already-used material to another elementReuse a material already in your design on another element, either with the material picker or from the material dropdown.
- Apply different colours to a panel design's inner and outer areasCreate a panel design and map its base and applied colours to shutter external, carcass external, shutter or a custom finish so the inner and outer areas show different colours.
- Apply finishes from the house button catalogPick a finish for a unit's shutter or carcass slot from the full house catalog and apply it with a swatch.
- Change a 3D object's material via Meshes and MaterialsOpen Meshes and Materials for a selected 3D object and switch its material to laminate with the finish you want.
- Change a single panel's material from the panel sectionSelect one panel and give it a material of its own, separate from the cabinet-level material.
- Correct a glass shutter and match a panel design finishFix a shutter that inherited a solid core and give a panel design the same finish as the rest of the unit.
- How exposed panel finish is appliedLearn how exposed panels take their finish by default and how to give one a different look.
- How panel thickness is driven by the core materialLearn how a panel's thickness follows from the core material you add to it.
- Link finish material to cabinet with internal and external finishesApply finishes to a cabinet by linking its external and internal finish materials in the finish material properties.
- Set project standards for cabinets and wardrobes in Global PreferencesSet core material, finishes, shutters and handles once at project level so every cabinet and wardrobe you add afterwards defaults to those standards.
- Change a linked panel finish at the individual panel levelMark a panel as custom at the individual panel level so you can change its linked finish or edge band there.
- Change a panel's core material via the material pickerOpen the material picker, select the core material on the page, then set the panel role at panel level.
- Change cabinet internal colour at cabinet levelSelect a cabinet, go to cabinet level and set its internal colour so the change applies to the cabinet internals.
- Change finishes in QC mode and see them in the 3D viewReplace a finish while in QC mode and the 3D view stays in sync with your change.
- Check edge bands and finishes in the material listReview edge bands for shutters and carcass in the material list.
- Configure material and carcass preferences in design preferencesSet material and configuration preferences inside the design application under design preferences.
- How board grain orientation is definedLearn how board width and length map to widthwise and lengthwise grain.
- How drawer finishes inherit carcass finishesLearn how drawer finishes follow the carcass internal and external finish until you change them explicitly at the drawer system level.
- How finish categories control shutter and carcass surfacesLearn how the four finish categories decide which panel surface a finish is applied to and why choosing correctly matters.
- How new cabinets get their default shutter thicknessLearn where the shutter thickness applied to a newly placed cabinet comes from.
- How the back panel material is chosen for a 16 mm HDMR carcassLearn how setting a cabinet carcass to 16 mm HDMR automatically applies a 6 mm HDMR back panel.
- Read and set a panel's inheritance source and edgeband linkingCheck the current source of each material and choose which unit-level channel a panel's edges resolve through.
- Reuse project materials without reopening the catalogueSelect a finish or material already used in the project directly, without picking it from the catalogue again.
- Set shutter and carcass core material and thickness from Quick AccessSet the shutter and carcass core material and its thickness from Quick Access.
- Apply a material to all instances of a repeated componentOpen material settings from the design element's settings panel to push a material across repeated components.
- Assign different core materials to different unit typesGive each unit type its own core material so wall units can differ from base units.
- Assign materials by searching subcategory in the material panelOpen the material or properties panel and select a material to apply it to the selected geometry.
- Change a core from QC mode's Core Materials selectorPick a core from QC mode's Core Materials selector and confirm the change by its toast, then close the core carousel left open at the bottom of the screen.
- Change a material colour via carousel, used-materials dropdown or pickerPick a colour from the carousel, switch between laminate and veneer categories, or reuse a colour already in the design from the used-materials dropdown.
- Change core and finish materials from the properties panelChange core and finish materials from the properties panel.
- Change finish, core material and countertop thickness at unit levelPick a unit's finish and core material from the carousel or dropdown.
- Choose carcass external and internal finishesPick the carcass external finish and the carcass internal finish from their own material pickers in the cabinet's properties panel after selecting the cabinet, with the internal picker setting the inside colour.
- Customize dimensions, materials, finishes and countertop in Quick AccessApply catalog finishes to shutter and carcass faces and pick a countertop from the catalog in Quick Access.
- Do not change cabinet material texture scale or image locallyMaterial texture properties such as the texture image and width/height scale are controlled centrally in the catalogue, so leave them unchanged in the design.
- Find every material used or tried in the designOpen the drop-down on the first line of the third bottom-left panel button to see every material used or tried in the design.
- Find panels not following carcass materialSpot panels whose custom core material does not follow the carcass by looking for the custom core property under the core section.
- Fix a panel that did not follow a cabinet material changeFind out why one panel kept its material and how automation rules and linked SKUs override inheritance.
- How a carcass panel's core is chosenLearn where a carcass panel's core comes from and when the panel keeps its own board.
- How double-sided laminate pasting is countedLearn how the system counts laminate material when it is pasted on both faces of a panel.
- How exposed panels take shutter core and finishLearn what happens to a panel's core material, finish and board layout when you change it to an exposed panel.
- How panel thickness formulas read the cabinet-level core materialLearn where a panel thickness formula such as carcass panel thickness or shutter panel thickness takes its value from.
- Make a panel follow another finishLink a panel's finish slot to another finish so the panel inherits it and updates automatically when that finish changes.
- Make the greyed-out Top switch available in Carcass Panels VisibilitySet Railing Options > Top > Type to 'Full' so the Top switch in Carcass Panels Visibility becomes available, then use the visibility switches to remove the top panel or front skirting panel.
- Override a material colour in design using RGB valuesChange a material's colour for a single design without editing the catalogue by entering RGB values in the texture dropdown.
- Rotate the finish grain or texture on a panelRotate a laminate's grain or texture on a panel face by 0, 90, 180 or 270 degrees from the panel's material section.
- Select core material and edge band for cabinetsChoose the core material and edge band specification for your cabinets, and optionally set skirting finishes.
- Set drawer filler width and match filler panel material thicknessMake a drawer filler panel thicker by giving it its own custom core material so it matches the surrounding 25 mm board.
- Set external finish equal to internal in construction styleLink the external finish to the internal finish in a construction style so both stay the same.
- Set External finish source to shutter external finishSet the External finish source to the shutter external finish so a thick shutter core gets its finish from the right place.
- Set panel visibility and finish per panelSelect the correct panel before changing its finish, because visibility settings apply per panel.
- Understand how panel materials inherit from unit rolesLearn which unit-level material channel each panel role inherits from and when a change flows down to a panel.
- Update panels with Custom Finish after a bulk finish changeChange project finishes in bulk, then update any panel whose finish source is set to Custom Finish one by one on the panel itself.
- Use a finish row's three-dot menu and apply material changes to all instancesOpen a finish row's three-dot menu to clone a material, open Material Settings or reset to default, and see the change on every unit using that finish.
- Use filter by unit SK name to narrow materials in large projectsNarrow the materials shown in the material QC view of a large project by filtering on a key such as unit SK name.
- Use the house button to see the full material catalogueOpen the material or finish picker through the house button so you can reach every available option.
ਸ਼ਟਰ ਅਤੇ ਦਰਵਾਜ਼ੇ149
- ਕੱਚ ਅਤੇ ਕੇਂਦਰੀ ਪ੍ਰੋਫਾਈਲਾਂ ਨਾਲ ਅਲਮੀਨੀਅਮ ਪ੍ਰੋਫਾਈਲ ਸ਼ਟਰ ਬਣਾਓਕੱਚ ਦੇ ਕੋਰ ਅਤੇ ਕੇਂਦਰੀ ਪ੍ਰੋਫਾਈਲ ਵਾਲਾ ਅਲਮੀਨੀਅਮ ਪ੍ਰੋਫਾਈਲ ਸ਼ਟਰ ਬਣਾਓ, ਇਸਨੂੰ ਵੱਖ-ਵੱਖ ਪੈਨਲਾਂ ਵਿੱਚ ਵੰਡ ਕੇ।
- ਇੱਕ ਯੂਨਿਟ ਵਿੱਚ ਸ਼ਟਰ ਸਿਸਟਮ ਕਨਫਿਗਰੇਸ਼ਨ ਸ਼ਾਮਲ ਕਰੋਇੱਕ ਯੂਨਿਟ ਲਈ ਸ਼ਟਰ ਸਿਸਟਮ ਕਨਫਿਗਰੇਸ਼ਨ ਸ਼ਾਮਲ ਕਰੋ ਅਤੇ ਸ਼ਟਰ ਦੀ ਕਿਸਮ ਅਤੇ ਪ੍ਰੋਫਾਈਲ ਚੁਣੋ।
- ਫਿੰਗਰ ਗਰੂਵ ਅਤੇ ਹੈਂਡਲ ਰਹਿਤ ਸ਼ਟਰ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਲਾਗੂ ਕਰੋਕੈਬਿਨੈਟ ਅਤੇ ਵਾਰਡਰੋਬ 'ਤੇ ਫਿੰਗਰ ਗਰੂਵ ਅਤੇ ਹੈਂਡਲ ਰਹਿਤ ਸ਼ਟਰ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਸ਼ਟਰ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਅਧੀਨ ਸ਼ਟਰ ਸਿਸਟਮ ਤੋਂ ਲਾਗੂ ਕਰੋ।
- ਸ਼ਟਰ ਸਿਸਟਮ ਲੈਵਲ ਤੋਂ ਸ਼ਟਰ ਹੈਂਡਲ, ਐਕਸੈਸਰੀ, ਮਕੈਨਿਜ਼ਮ ਅਤੇ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਬਦਲੋਸ਼ਟਰ ਸਿਸਟਮ ਲੈਵਲ ਤੋਂ ਸ਼ਟਰ ਦਾ ਹੈਂਡਲ, ਮਕੈਨਿਜ਼ਮ ਅਤੇ ਕੈਟਾਲਾਗ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਬਦਲੋ।
- Modify Shutter Design ਲਾਇਬ੍ਰੇਰੀ ਤੋਂ ਸ਼ਟਰ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਲਾਗੂ ਕਰੋਲਾਇਬ੍ਰੇਰੀ ਤੋਂ ਸ਼ਟਰ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਚੁਣੋ ਅਤੇ ਚੁਣੇ ਹੋਏ ਸ਼ਟਰ ਪੈਨਲਾਂ ਉੱਤੇ ਲਾਗੂ ਕਰੋ, ਜਿੱਥੇ ਇਹ ਤਿਆਰ ਮਾਪ ਅਨੁਸਾਰ ਸਕੇਲ ਹੁੰਦਾ ਹੈ।
- ਇੱਕ ਲੰਬੀ ਯੂਨਿਟ ਨੂੰ ਠੋਸ ਹੇਠਲੇ ਅਤੇ ਕੱਚ ਦੇ ਉੱਪਰਲੇ ਸ਼ਟਰਾਂ ਵਿੱਚ ਵੰਡੋਉੱਪਰਲੇ ਸ਼ਟਰ ਦਾ ਮਕੈਨਿਜ਼ਮ ਅਤੇ ਪੈਨਲ ਦੇ ਕੋਰ ਮਟੀਰੀਅਲ ਸੈੱਟ ਕਰਕੇ ਠੋਸ ਹੇਠਲੇ ਸ਼ਟਰ ਅਤੇ ਕੱਚ ਦੇ ਉੱਪਰਲੇ ਸ਼ਟਰ ਵਾਲੀ ਮਿਸ਼ਰਤ ਲੰਬੀ ਯੂਨਿਟ ਬਣਾਓ।
ਸਭ ਵੇਖੋ (149)
- ਕੈਬਿਨੈਟਾਂ ਅਤੇ ਵਾਰਡਰੋਬਾਂ ਉੱਤੇ ਸ਼ਟਰ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਸੇਵ ਕਰੋ ਅਤੇ ਦੁਬਾਰਾ ਵਰਤੋInfurnia ਵਿੱਚ ਸ਼ਟਰ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਸੇਵ ਕਰੋ ਅਤੇ modify shutter design ਰਾਹੀਂ ਇਸਨੂੰ ਕੈਬਿਨੈਟਾਂ ਅਤੇ ਵਾਰਡਰੋਬਾਂ ਉੱਤੇ ਲਾਗੂ ਕਰੋ।
- ਕੈਬਿਨੈੱਟ ਦੀ ਸ਼ਟਰ ਕਿਸਮ ਜਾਂ ਮਕੈਨਿਜ਼ਮ ਬਦਲੋਕੈਬਿਨੈੱਟ ਨੂੰ ਦੁਬਾਰਾ ਬਣਾਏ ਬਿਨਾਂ ਉਸ ਦੀ ਸ਼ਟਰ ਕਿਸਮ ਜਾਂ ਖੁੱਲ੍ਹਣ ਵਾਲਾ ਮਕੈਨਿਜ਼ਮ ਬਦਲੋ।
- ਪੂਰੀ ਕੈਬਿਨੈਟ ਜਾਂ ਇੱਕ ਪਾਰਟੀਸ਼ਨ ਵਿੱਚ ਸ਼ਟਰ ਸਿਸਟਮ ਸ਼ਾਮਲ ਕਰੋਖੁੱਲ੍ਹੀ ਕੈਬਿਨੈਟ ਵਿੱਚ ਪੂਰੀ ਤਰ੍ਹਾਂ ਜਾਂ ਸਿਰਫ਼ ਇੱਕ ਪਾਰਟੀਸ਼ਨ ਵਿੱਚ ਸ਼ਟਰ ਸਿਸਟਮ ਸ਼ਾਮਲ ਕਰੋ।
- ਪੈਨਲ-ਪੱਧਰ ਐਕਸਟ੍ਰੂਡ ਨਾਲ ਦੋ-ਸ਼ੇਡ ਲੈਮੀਨੇਟ ਸ਼ਟਰ ਬਣਾਓਪੈਨਲ ਪੱਧਰ 'ਤੇ ਕਸਟਮ ਆਕਾਰ ਖਿੱਚ ਕੇ ਅਤੇ ਇਸ ਨੂੰ ਬਿਨਾਂ ਬਦਲੇ ਲਾਗੂ ਕਰਕੇ ਵਾਰਡਰੋਬ ਸ਼ਟਰ ਨੂੰ ਦੋ-ਸ਼ੇਡ ਲੈਮੀਨੇਟ ਫਿਨਿਸ਼ ਦਿਓ, ਤਾਂ ਜੋ ਇਸ ਦੀ ਆਪਣੀ ਫਿਨਿਸ਼ਿੰਗ ਪ੍ਰਕਿਰਿਆ ਰਹੇ।
- ਸਲਾਈਡਿੰਗ ਸ਼ਟਰ ਸਿਸਟਮ ਪਾਓ ਅਤੇ ਪੈਨਲਾਂ ਉੱਤੇ ਬਾਹਰੀ ਫਿਨਿਸ਼ ਲਗਾਓਸਲਾਈਡਿੰਗ ਸ਼ਟਰ ਸਿਸਟਮ ਪਾ ਕੇ, ਪੈਨਲ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਵਿਕਲਪਾਂ ਨੂੰ ਅਨੁਕੂਲਿਤ ਕਰਕੇ ਅਤੇ ਪੈਨਲਾਂ ਉੱਤੇ ਬਾਹਰੀ ਫਿਨਿਸ਼ ਲਗਾ ਕੇ ਵਾਰਡਰੋਬ ਪੂਰਾ ਕਰੋ।
- ਕਿਸੇ ਖਾਸ ਸ਼ਟਰ ਫੇਸ ਖੇਤਰ ਉੱਤੇ ਵੱਖਰਾ ਲੈਮੀਨੇਟ ਲਗਾਓਸ਼ਟਰ ਦੀ ਸ਼ਕਲ ਪਰਿਭਾਸ਼ਿਤ ਕਰੋ, ਫਿਰ ਇੱਕ ਫੇਸ ਖੇਤਰ ਉੱਤੇ ਵੱਖਰਾ ਲੈਮੀਨੇਟ ਲਗਾਓ ਤਾਂ ਜੋ ਬਾਕੀ ਆਪਣੀ ਡਿਫਾਲਟ ਸਮੱਗਰੀ ਰੱਖੇ।
- Change Model ਵਿਕਲਪ ਰਾਹੀਂ ਦਰਵਾਜ਼ੇ ਜਾਂ ਖਿੜਕੀ ਦੀ ਕਿਸਮ ਬਦਲੋਰੱਖੇ ਹੋਏ ਦਰਵਾਜ਼ੇ ਜਾਂ ਖਿੜਕੀ ਨੂੰ ਕੈਰੋਸੈਲ ਵਿੱਚੋਂ ਕਿਸੇ ਹੋਰ ਮਾਡਲ ਨਾਲ ਬਦਲੋ ਅਤੇ ਇਸ ਦਾ ਆਕਾਰ, ਕਬਜ਼ੇ ਵਾਲਾ ਪਾਸਾ ਅਤੇ ਸਥਿਤੀ ਵਿਵਸਥਿਤ ਕਰੋ।
- ਸ਼ਟਰ 'ਤੇ ਅੱਗੇ ਜਾਂ ਪਿੱਛੇ ਸ਼ੀਸ਼ਾ ਜੋੜੋ ਅਤੇ ਕਿਨਾਰੇ ਦੇ ਆਫਸੈੱਟ ਸੈੱਟ ਕਰੋਸ਼ਟਰ 'ਤੇ ਸ਼ੀਸ਼ਾ ਜੋੜੋ ਅਤੇ ਸ਼ੀਸ਼ੇ ਅਤੇ ਸ਼ਟਰ ਦੇ ਕਿਨਾਰਿਆਂ ਵਿਚਕਾਰ ਖਾਲੀ ਥਾਂ ਨੂੰ ਕੰਟਰੋਲ ਕਰੋ।
- Modify Shutter Design ਰਾਹੀਂ ਆਮ ਸ਼ਟਰ ਨੂੰ ਪ੍ਰੋਫਾਈਲ ਸ਼ਟਰ ਵਿੱਚ ਬਦਲੋਪੈਨਲ ਦੀ ਜਿਓਮੈਟਰੀ ਹੱਥ ਨਾਲ ਸੋਧਣ ਦੀ ਬਜਾਏ ਸ਼ਟਰ ਸੈਟਿੰਗਾਂ ਰਾਹੀਂ ਆਮ ਸ਼ਟਰ ਨੂੰ ਪ੍ਰੋਫਾਈਲ ਸ਼ਟਰ ਵਿੱਚ ਬਦਲੋ।
- ਸ਼ਟਰ ਸਿਸਟਮ ਸੈਟਿੰਗਾਂ ਰਾਹੀਂ ਹੈਂਡਲ ਦੀ ਕਿਸਮ, ਓਰੀਐਂਟੇਸ਼ਨ ਅਤੇ ਸਥਿਤੀ ਬਦਲੋਹੈਂਡਲ ਦੀਆਂ ਕਿਸਮਾਂ ਬਦਲਣ, ਓਰੀਐਂਟੇਸ਼ਨ ਸੈੱਟ ਕਰਨ ਅਤੇ ਸਥਿਤੀ ਕਨਫਿਗਰ ਕਰਨ ਲਈ ਸ਼ਟਰ ਸਿਸਟਮ ਸੈਟਿੰਗਾਂ ਖੋਲ੍ਹੋ।
- ਸ਼ਟਰ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਪਲਾਈ ਫਿਨਿਸ਼ ਡਿਸਪਲੇ ਨਾਲ ਪਲਾਈ, ਫਿਨਿਸ਼ ਅਤੇ ਐਜ ਬੈਂਡ ਕੰਟਰੋਲ ਕਰੋਸ਼ਟਰ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ SKU ਉੱਤੇ 'ply finish display' ਪ੍ਰਾਪਰਟੀ ਸੈੱਟ ਕਰੋ ਤਾਂ ਜੋ ਤੈਅ ਹੋ ਸਕੇ ਕਿ ਹੇਠਲਾ ਪੈਨਲ ਕੀ ਯੋਗਦਾਨ ਪਾਉਂਦਾ ਹੈ ਅਤੇ ਉਸ ਦਾ ਫਿਨਿਸ਼ ਤੇ ਐਜ ਬੈਂਡ ਕਿਵੇਂ ਵਿਵਹਾਰ ਕਰਦੇ ਹਨ।
- Add a shutter to a partitionGive a partition its own shutter and choose between a single shutter, a double swing or a lift-up.
- Change shutter design and handle at individual shutter levelSelect an individual shutter and use the "Shutter design" option to change its design or handle.
- Create profile shutters via shutter system constructionBuild a profile shutter by adding the required handle and non-handle side profiles from the catalogue in Shutter System Construction.
- Reduce shutter panel width via construction extension parametersNarrow a shutter panel without changing the overall cabinet by adjusting its left and right edge values.
- Add handle profiles via Construction then Shutter ProfileConfigure shutter handle profiles by opening Construction then Shutter Profile and selecting the profile types in the correct sequence.
- Add multiple hinge crank types to the hardware libraryEvery furniture item uses the default hinge unless you switch it to another crank type from the hardware library.
- Choose the opening direction for shuttersLearn which shutter systems offer the Toggle Opening direction control and how to change a corner unit's opening instead.
- Convert a standard wardrobe to sliding by replacing shuttersTurn a standard wardrobe into a sliding wardrobe by deleting its existing shutters and adding a new shutter system configured as two-door or three-door sliding.
- Create glass shutters and add profile handlesTurn a shutter panel into a glass shutter by switching its core material to a glass core in the Customize tab.
- ਦਰਵਾਜ਼ੇ ਦਾ ਖੁੱਲ੍ਹਣ ਦਾ ਪਾਸਾ ਅਤੇ ਕਬਜ਼ਾ ਪਲਟੋ, ਅਤੇ ਦੀਵਾਰ ਤੋਂ ਦੂਰੀ ਸੈੱਟ ਕਰੋਰੱਖਿਆ ਹੋਇਆ ਦਰਵਾਜ਼ਾ ਚੁਣੋ ਅਤੇ ਇਸ ਦੇ ਪਾਸੇ ਜਾਂ ਕਬਜ਼ਾ ਪਲਟੋ ਤਾਂ ਜੋ ਇਹ ਕਿਸ ਪਾਸੇ ਖੁੱਲ੍ਹਦਾ ਹੈ ਅਤੇ ਕਿੱਥੇ ਕਬਜ਼ਾ ਲੱਗਾ ਹੈ, ਇਹ ਬਦਲ ਸਕੇ।
- Remove or change a shutter handleTake the handle off one shutter or pick a different handle, then adjust its settings in the left panel.
- Use shutter system configuration for profile shuttersChange the glass colour of a profile shutter from the custom core instead of using shutter design.
- Add profile shutters and change handles via shutter system config and catalogAdd a shutter system to a cabinet's parent partition so a shutter is created automatically.
- Change a cabinet's shutter system config from the Customize tabSelect the partition or shutter system and pick the required shutter system from the Customize tab so its config matches the new cabinet structure.
- How cabinet structure splits into shutters, drawers and accessoriesLearn how a cabinet's structure is divided into shutters, drawers and accessories, and how shutter and drawer systems are configured separately.
- Remove a shutter profile or change core materialRemove the handle or non-handle profile from the Shutter Profiles section and change the shutter core material.
- Add a shutter to a single partition via Add Shutter SystemPlace a shutter on just one partition of a cabinet by selecting that partition and choosing Add Shutter System from its options.
- Add, edit and remove shutter systems per partitionManage shutter systems partition by partition, including sizes, removals and replacements.
- Add shutter profiles in shutter system construction settingsSelect the shutter, open its shutter system construction settings, and pick the handle and non-handle profiles from the profile library.
- Change a shutter's opening directionFlip a shutter's hinge side and let the software update the hinge-side manufacturing details for you.
- Choose wardrobe shutter types in unit configurationPick the shutter arrangement you need from the shutter types available in the unit configuration instead of modelling it manually.
- Flip door side, hinge, and two-way opening from door orientationsControl how a selected door opens by flipping its side or hinge, or enabling two-way opening.
- Understand the four finish slots and core materialsLearn which finish slots and core materials a cabinet has and how they feed cutting and pricing.
- Add shelves via partition and shutters via shutter systemAdd a shelf with the partition option and add shutters with the Add Shutter System option, then set the mechanism to single or double swing.
- Align shutters with panels and partitionsAdjust per-edge reductions so shutters sit flush or leave a partition uncovered.
- Change a shutter's opening mechanism via shutter system construction settingsChange how a shutter opens by selecting the shutter mechanism in the shutter system construction settings.
- Change corner unit shutters with shutter designsChange the shutters on a corner unit through shutter designs, since shutter configuration presets cannot be applied to corner cabinets.
- Change frame and glass colour on a cabinet's shuttersChange the glass at the cabinet level through Custom Core, and the frame colour through Shutter System Config, which replaces the whole configuration.
- Control shutter edge visibility with the visible edge band settingSet the shutter visible edge band value to determine which edge band is shown on shutters.
- Customise or remove glass profile shuttersCustomise or remove the shutters on a glass profile to change how the glass looks.
- Gola and profile placementLearn where a gola and a profile are applied in cabinet modelling and how both can appear on the same cabinet.
- How shutter dimensions are calculated from outer sizeLearn how the system derives a shutter's size by subtracting design parameters from the outer dimensions.
- Remove the default shutter design from cabinet preferencesStop a shutter design being applied by default to new cabinet designs by clearing it in admin preferences.
- Set a door's opening direction and two-way openingChoose whether a door is left-opening or right-opening, and enable two-way opening so it opens on both sides.
- Set profile shutter height from profile thicknessConfigure a profile shutter so its height matches the profile thickness, and keep it in sync when that thickness changes.
- Switch a cabinet to profile handles or a handleless doorChange a cabinet from normal handles to profile handles or a handleless door directly during design, with no separate catalogue or construction setup.
- Understand profile dimensions in a profile shutter systemLearn how each profile element's own Dimensions, H and D values change that profile and the glass in a profile shutter system.
- Understand the shutter back gap and hinge screw edge distanceLearn how the 2 mm gap between a shutter and the carcass front affects the hinge screw edge distance.
- Add horizontal divisions to a shutterSplit a shutter into panels with the Divisional Shutter dropdown and see the division in the 3D model.
- Apply a shutter system to a cabinetChoose a swing, sliding or lift-up shutter system and apply it to a cabinet from the customize tab.
- Change a single shutter to a double swing shutterSplit one shutter into two by switching its shutter mechanism to double swing.
- Change cabinet shutter type and opening direction in Shutter System ConstructionSwitch the shutter mechanism between Single Swing and Double Swing, then flip the shutter opening direction from the same panel.
- Change handle placement on a shutterSelect the shutter and set its handle to a position such as Right top or Right middle.
- Change handles on several cabinets at onceMulti-select the cabinets and use the 'modify handle' option in the properties panel to change their handles together.
- Choose shutter mechanism type when applying lift-up shuttersPick the shutter mechanism that matches how you want the shutter to open.
- Create a curved shutter by editing the panel design and cuttingDraw the shutter shape in Edit Panel Design and cut it to the panel thickness to create a curved shutter.
- Delete a shutter handle from the selection treeRemove a handle from a shutter by deleting its entry in the selection tree.
- Divide a wardrobe into main partitions before adding shuttersSplit the wardrobe into main partitions first, then subdivide them for shelves and verticals, and add shutter systems with customised mechanisms afterwards.
- Enable shutter panel for manual dimensioning to measure carcass to shutterMeasure from carcass to shutter in the floor plan by enabling panels for manual dimensioning and selecting the shutter panel.
- Fine-tune handle position with the shift optionMove a placed handle vertically or laterally with the shift option to fine-tune where it sits on the shutter.
- How shutters are reduced by 1mm on all four sidesLearn how the default shutter construction reduces shutters by 1mm on all four sides and applies it automatically.
- Set handle and non-handle profiles on a shutterGive the handle edge and the remaining edges their own profile, thickness and colour.
- Set shutters and drawers to internal finish to keep outer frame visibleMake the outer frame sit outside the shutter face by setting the shutter to internal and the drawer facia to the external finish.
- Toggle opening direction and set lift-up mechanism on tall unitsToggle a tall unit's opening direction and set its mechanism to a single lift-up configuration.
- ਚੌੜਾਈ, ਉਚਾਈ, ਮੋਟਾਈ ਅਤੇ ਕੰਧ ਤੋਂ ਦੂਰੀ ਨਾਲ ਦਰਵਾਜ਼ੇ ਸ਼ਾਮਲ ਕਰੋ ਅਤੇ ਸੰਪਾਦਿਤ ਕਰੋਫਲੋਰ ਪਲਾਨ ਵਿੱਚ ਕੰਧ ਉੱਤੇ ਦਰਵਾਜ਼ਾ ਰੱਖੋ, ਇਸਦਾ ਆਕਾਰ ਅਤੇ ਕੰਧ ਤੋਂ ਦੂਰੀ ਸੈੱਟ ਕਰੋ, ਅਤੇ ਇਸਦਾ ਮਾਡਲ ਅਤੇ ਸਮੱਗਰੀ ਬਦਲੋ।
- Add vertical or horizontal divisions inside a shutterSplit a shutter into sections by adding a vertical or horizontal division in shutter system construction, then select and adjust it.
- Adjust skirting height and shutter system under wardrobe constructionChange the skirting height or shutter system for wardrobes and standard cabinets from the third tab under wardrobe construction options.
- Change drawer facia via drawer level shutter configChange the facia of a drawer by selecting a shutter configuration at the drawer level of the drawer system.
- Change shutter edge-reduction values on shutters already in the designLearn that shutter edge-reduction values are general construction defaults and change them on shutters already in the design with bulk edit.
- Choose drawer system for drawers and shutter system for shutters in constructionConfigure each cabinet front under the right system and construction, drawers under the drawer system and shutters under the shutter system.
- Configure a sliding door with internal shutter system propertiesInsert the sliding mechanism and set the shutter system to internal shutter system in properties to create a sliding door.
- Design a rolling shutter as a shutter designDesign a rolling shutter as a shutter design in the platform and switch between the available shutters when more than one exists.
- How shutter system configuration adapts to any furniture sizeLearn how shutter system configuration applies to any furniture and scales its profiles and glass automatically to the shutter size.
- How the Automatic Shutter Design Picker picks the closest-size designLearn how the Automatic Shutter Design Picker compares designs in the same catalog group and picks the closest size.
- Keep shutter widths within single and double shutter limitsLearn the width limits for single and double shutters and how to divide a single shutter into a double swing shutter.
- ਦਰਵਾਜ਼ਾ ਲਗਾਓ ਅਤੇ ਇਸਦੀ ਚੌੜਾਈ, ਮੋਟਾਈ, ਉਚਾਈ ਅਤੇ ਉਭਾਰ ਸੈੱਟ ਕਰੋਕੰਧ ਉੱਤੇ ਦਰਵਾਜ਼ਾ ਲਗਾਓ ਅਤੇ ਖੱਬੇ ਪੈਨਲ ਉੱਤੇ ਇਸਦੀ ਚੌੜਾਈ, ਮੋਟਾਈ ਅਤੇ ਉਚਾਈ ਸੋਧੋ।
- Set shutter construction type and divisional profileChoose the shutter construction type and add a divisional profile once the shutter has a division.
- Set the shutter gap for double swing shuttersApply a consistent gap between the two panels of double swing shutters and on corner units.
- Set the shutter width on a blind corner cabinetSee where a blind corner cabinet's shutter width sits alongside its cabinet width, depth and height.
- Understand profile handle placement and defaultsLearn where profile handles can sit and which side or end they default to on wall, base and framed shutters.
- Understand where shutter reductions come fromLearn how the four margin values are set by construction preferences and why each shutter can still differ.
- Use the wall gola profile for wall units, not the base profilePick the wall gola profile when adding a gola profile to a wall cabinet, since the base profile is wrong for wall units.
- Add a basket on the shutter via shutter customizeAdd a separate basket accessory on the shutter panel so a basket appears on the shutter when it opens.
- Apply shutter extension through shutter construction settingsApply the shutter extension over an end panel through the shutter construction settings each time, since it cannot be predefined per unit.
- Attach shutter mechanism hardware and manage its quantityAttach lift-up pistons, flap fittings, sliding rail sets and rolling-shutter mechanisms from the door-system menu, then control how many copies are attached.
- Check a cabinet's shutter hardware mechanism in 3D or via BOQSee that the shutter hardware mechanism is associated with the specific cabinet it is applied to.
- Check shutter settings after correcting shutter reductionsCorrect the shutter reduction in the construction preferences, then check or bulk-edit the shutter settings of units already placed in existing designs.
- Choose a profile or gola handle for a shutterSelect a profile handle such as a gola, J profile or C profile as the handle category to apply.
- Choose a wardrobe shutter configurationSet the wardrobe section to swing, single-shutter or double-shutter to match how its doors open.
- Choose between sliding and swing shutter systemsShutter systems in a cabinet can be configured as sliding or swing mechanisms, and you can remove or change the shutter system independently of the partition position.
- Create a shutter cutout with offset and fillet, then add a glass insetCut a shaped opening in a shutter panel and finish it with a glass inset.
- Create open wall unit panels and set shutter mechanism to noneSet the shutter mechanism to none when the unit is not a shutter.
- Edit door and window dimensions, model, and flip hinges from properties tabSelect a door or window and open the properties tab to change its dimensions, floor elevation, and opening direction.
- Fix a shutter door extending past the cabinet bottom edgeCheck the shutter reduction values in Preferences > Cabinet/Wardrobe > Construction > Shutter System to explain a door that extends past the bottom edge.
- How a vertical gola handle is shared between two unitsSee how a vertical gola handle links two adjacent units, recesses both side panels, and what happens when it is removed.
- How shutter sizing reductions and Shutter Gap work in a construction styleLearn how a construction style reduces every side of a shutter and applies a separate Shutter Gap between the two panels of a double shutter, both set in the construction style preferences.
- Map hinges automatically from shutter heightSet the shutter dimensions and the hinges are mapped for you, with no manual entry.
- Merge shutters and drawer fasciasMake one shutter span several partitions or one fascia span several drawers, and learn what the merge requires.
- Model loft constructions with 0-crank hingesLoft constructions are always modelled with 0-crank hinges.
- Open a shutter in the 3D viewRight-click a shutter in the 3D view to open it.
- Place doors after walls and edit size, height, thickness, hinge and modelAdd doors after your walls are ready, then adjust each door's size, orientation and model so it looks right in 3D.
- Remove a drawer system from a unitRemove the drawer system from a unit and see the unit with no drawer system.
- Remove shutter panel division via panel-level customizationRemove the division on a shutter panel so the shutter shows as a single panel without a split line.
- Resize shutter panels via Reduction, not Extension parametersResize a shutter panel larger or smaller by using the Reduction parameters instead of the Extension parameters.
- Restore a removed shutter system on a partitionAdd a single swing shutter system back to a partition whose shutter system was removed, and see how shutter configurations and reduction settings behave.
- Set door elevation and shift a door in its propertiesLearn where elevation sits in the door properties panel, why a door's elevation is zero, and how to shift the door along either direction.
- Set drawer-fascia reductionsShrink drawer fascias from the drawer's construction settings and create gaps next to fillers.
- Set placement for a normal knob or bar handleUse the 9-position grid and orientation choice to place a normal knob or bar handle, including on gas-lift systems.
- Set the gap between shuttersSelect the shutter in the tree, open the shutter system, and set the gap value on the construction tab.
- Sliding door panel sizing and construction parametersLearn how sliding shutter panels are sized and how the construction parameters control how the tracks and panels sit relative to the carcass.
- Use FR shortcut to create a wardrobe designStart a wardrobe design with the FR shortcut, then place double swing shutters and manage internal carcass elements.
- Add a partition configuration to a wardrobe with or without shuttersAdd an internal layout to the root partition whether the shutters are still on or have been removed.
- Add finger group details for sliding door top and bottom in hardware adminEdit construction elements and shutter offsets for sliding door top and bottom finger group details.
- Apply 3D shutter designs to cabinets via modify shutter designsApply 3D shutter designs to cabinets through modify shutter designs, where glass designs also support autoscaling.
- Apply a G profile as a handle on sliding wardrobe shuttersApply a G profile handle to a sliding wardrobe shutter through the normal handle application flow for the shutter.
- Change shutter reductions per sideEnter reduction amounts on the left, right, top and bottom shift fields to resize a shutter.
- Check why a shutter edge has no edgeband with a Gola handleLearn how a Gola, profile or finger-groove handle can replace the edgeband on the shutter edge it sits on, and how to tell that from a defect.
- Choose shutter design options in the shutter system propertySet the shutter design options in the shutter system property, since shutter and drawer systems share properties except for construction.
- Convert a shutter to a plain panel by setting mechanism to noneMake a panel without a cabinet shutter by setting the shutter system mechanism to none, then set its construction parameters.
- Edit shutter gaps in bulk and undo extensionsChange the Shutter Gap across several units at once and remove unwanted shutter extensions.
- Finger groove panel handles on base unitsApply an FGP handle so its groove is cut into base-unit shutters and the carcass adapts, and learn where it works and where a custom panel is needed.
- How gola and FGP handles shrink shutters and drawersLearn how gola and finger-groove handle items automatically shorten shutters and drawer fronts through reduction values set on the handle item.
- How hardware positioning and shutter reductions workLearn how the platform handles hardware positioning on shutters and shutter reductions as built-in features for modular furniture.
- How profile handles default to top on base units and bottom on wall unitsLearn where a profile handle sits by default on base and wall unit shutters and when the handle placement property overrides it.
- How shutters are treated as external or internalLearn how the shutter system property treats shutters as external by default and what changes when you mark one as internal.
- Model a pocket door systemModel a pocket door system in the software, noting that its slide animation is not automated.
- Modify shutters, handles, drawers and materials from the property tabChange shutters, handles, drawers and materials from the property tab and see each change apply in a click.
- Open and close all shutters on a 3 Door Sliding Shutter systemSlide every door of a 3 Door Sliding Shutter system open or back from the Shutter System panel's Construction tab.
- Open and close drawers and shutters in a designOpen a drawer or shutter to see it move and stay that way when the design is reopened.
- Open construction to reach shutter profilesOpen construction to reach shutter profiles such as non-handle and handle profiles.
- PU ਸ਼ਟਰਾਂ ਅਤੇ ਅੰਦਰੂਨੀ ਦਰਾਜ਼ਾਂ ਤੋਂ ਕਿਨਾਰਾ ਬੈਂਡ ਹਟਾਓPU ਸ਼ਟਰਾਂ ਜਾਂ ਅੰਦਰੂਨੀ ਦਰਾਜ਼ਾਂ ਤੋਂ ਮੈਪ ਕੀਤਾ ਕਿਨਾਰਾ ਬੈਂਡ ਹਟਾਓ ਤਾਂ ਜੋ ਉਨ੍ਹਾਂ ਹਿੱਸਿਆਂ 'ਤੇ ਕਿਨਾਰਾ ਬਾਈਂਡਿੰਗ ਦਿਖਾਈ ਨਾ ਦੇਵੇ।
- Restore a deleted shutter systemRe-add a removed shutter system by selecting the partition and using Add Shutter System, or bring it back with Ctrl+Z straight after the removal.
- Rotate a handle only when its SKU has a left/right optionFlip or rotate a shutter handle only if its SKU offers a left/right orientation option, then set it horizontal or vertical.
- Set handle position on selected shutters after Modify HandleApply a handle to several selected cabinets or wardrobes through Modify Handle, then set the handle position for the selected shutters.
- ਸ਼ਟਰ ਸਿਸਟਮ ਨੂੰ ਅੰਦਰੂਨੀ ਤੇ ਸੈੱਟ ਕਰੋ ਅਤੇ ਖੁੱਲ੍ਹਣ ਦੀ ਦਿਸ਼ਾ ਟੌਗਲ ਕਰੋਇੱਕ ਅੰਦਰੂਨੀ ਸ਼ਟਰ ਬਾਹਰੀ ਕਿਸਮ ਵਾਂਗ ਹੀ ਸਿਧਾਂਤ ਉੱਤੇ ਕੰਮ ਕਰਦਾ ਹੈ।
- Set the shutter reduction for a J profile drawerSet the shutter reduction to 30 when you use a J profile drawer.
- Snap lofts carcass-to-carcass, not shutter-to-shutterAlign loft units by their carcasses rather than their shutters, since shutters carry a 2 mm gap between them.
- Understand handle carousel categories and handle coloursLearn how the handle carousel groups Gola Handles, Handles and Profile Handles, and why each handle colour appears as its own card.
- Understand the fixed main partition in a rolling shutter moduleLearn that a rolling shutter module's main partition is fixed and cannot be adjusted through the reduction parameters.
- Understand what the shutter back gap setting affectsLearn that the shutter back gap setting only changes 3D visualization and leaves cut lists and production data unchanged.
- Understand which parts can be animatedLearn that animation in the platform is restricted to shutter and drawer systems only.
- Use a shutterless box behind a unit for support panelsUse a shutterless box behind a unit to provide the support structure without a visible shutter.
ਦਰਾਜ਼ ਅਤੇ ਦਰਾਜ਼ ਸਿਸਟਮ108
- ਦਰਾਜ਼ ਦੀ ਉਚਾਈ ਬਦਲੋ ਅਤੇ ਬਾਸਕਟ ਜਾਂ ਕਟਲਰੀ ਟਰੇ ਵਰਗੇ ਦਰਾਜ਼ ਇਨਸਰਟ ਬਦਲੋਦਰਾਜ਼ ਦੀ ਉਚਾਈ ਸਮਾਓ, ਇਸ ਦੀ ਕਿਸਮ ਬਦਲੋ, ਅਤੇ ਤਾਰ ਦੇ ਬਾਸਕਟ ਜਾਂ PVC ਕਟਲਰੀ ਟਰੇ ਵਰਗੇ ਇਨਸਰਟ ਸ਼ਾਮਲ ਕਰੋ।
- ਦਰਾਜ਼ ਦੇ ਪੱਧਰ 'ਤੇ ਦਰਾਜ਼ ਦੀ ਉਚਾਈ ਅਤੇ ਡੂੰਘਾਈ ਸੋਧੋਦਰਾਜ਼ਾਂ ਦੀ ਉਚਾਈ ਅਤੇ ਡੂੰਘਾਈ ਸੈੱਟ ਕਰਨ ਲਈ ਉਹਨਾਂ ਦੀ ਚੋਣ ਕਰੋ, ਇੱਕ ਵਾਰ ਵਿੱਚ ਕਈ ਬਦਲੋ, ਅਤੇ Bottom Elevation ਨਾਲ ਦਰਾਜ਼ ਨੂੰ ਹੇਠਾਂ ਲੈ ਜਾਓ।
- ਪਾਰਟੀਸ਼ਨ ਤੋਂ ਦਰਾਜ਼ ਸੈੱਟ ਅਤੇ ਵਾਧੂ ਦਰਾਜ਼ ਸ਼ਾਮਲ ਕਰੋਪਾਰਟੀਸ਼ਨ ਪੱਧਰ 'ਤੇ ਦਰਾਜ਼ ਸੈੱਟ ਸ਼ਾਮਲ ਕਰੋ, ਫਿਰ ਵਾਧੂ ਦਰਾਜ਼ ਸ਼ਾਮਲ ਕਰੋ ਅਤੇ ਹਰੇਕ ਦਾ ਫੇਸ ਅਤੇ ਬਾਕਸ ਦੀ ਉਚਾਈ ਵੱਖਰੇ ਤੌਰ 'ਤੇ ਸੈੱਟ ਕਰੋ।
- Add a drawer to a cabinet via partition level and drawer setInsert a drawer inside a cabinet from its partition level, then set its heights and add a shelf below if needed.
- ਸ਼ਟਰ ਬੰਦ ਕਰਕੇ ਅਤੇ ਸ਼ੈਲਫ ਜ਼ੋਨ ਸ਼ਾਮਲ ਕਰਕੇ ਬਾਹਰੀ ਵਾਰਡਰੋਬ ਡਰਾਅਰ ਬਣਾਓਮੌਜੂਦਾ ਸ਼ਟਰ ਹਟਾਓ ਅਤੇ ਸ਼ੈਲਫ ਜ਼ੋਨ ਸ਼ਾਮਲ ਕਰੋ ਤਾਂ ਜੋ ਤੁਸੀਂ ਵਾਰਡਰੋਬ ਵਿੱਚ ਬਾਹਰੀ ਡਰਾਅਰ ਬਣਾ ਸਕੋ।
- ਬਾਕਸ ਡਰਾਇਰ ਬਣਾਵਟ ਅਤੇ ਇਸ ਦੇ ਉਚਾਈ ਆਫਸੈਟ ਨੂੰ ਸਮਝੋਦੇਖੋ ਕਿ ਬਾਕਸ ਡਰਾਇਰ ਸਪਸ਼ਟ ਉਚਾਈਆਂ ਅਤੇ ਹਰ ਡਰਾਇਰ ਦੇ ਆਫਸੈਟ ਨਾਲ ਉੱਪਰ ਤੋਂ ਕਿਵੇਂ ਲਟਕਦੇ ਹਨ, ਅਤੇ ਬਾਕਸ ਦੀ ਉਚਾਈ ਦਾ ਫਾਸੀਆ ਦੀ ਉਚਾਈ ਨਾਲ ਕੀ ਸੰਬੰਧ ਹੈ।
ਸਭ ਵੇਖੋ (108)
- Add drawers ਆਮ ਬਾਕਸ ਦਰਾਜ਼ ਜਾਂ ਦਰਾਜ਼ ਸੈੱਟ ਨਾਲAdd drawers ਜਾਂ ਤਾਂ ਆਮ (ਬਾਕਸ) ਦਰਾਜ਼ ਵਜੋਂ ਜਿਸ ਵਿੱਚ ਦਰਾਜ਼ਿਆਂ ਦੀ ਗਿਣਤੀ ਦਿੱਤੀ ਗਈ ਹੋਵੇ, ਜਾਂ ਦਰਾਜ਼ ਸੈੱਟ ਵਜੋਂ, ਅਤੇ ਦਰਾਜ਼ ਯੂਨਿਟ ਦੀ ਉਚਾਈ ਅਤੇ ਡੂੰਘਾਈ ਸੈੱਟ ਕਰੋ।
- ਬਾਕਸ ਡਰਾਇਰ ਵਿੱਚ ਬਦਲਣ ਤੋਂ ਬਾਅਦ ਡਰਾਇਰ ਸੈਟਿੰਗਾਂ ਦੁਬਾਰਾ ਜਾਂਚੋਡਰਾਇਰ ਨੂੰ ਸਧਾਰਨ ਤੋਂ ਬਾਕਸ ਕਿਸਮ ਵਿੱਚ ਬਦਲਣ ਤੋਂ ਬਾਅਦ ਡਰਾਇਰ-ਪੱਧਰ ਦੀਆਂ ਸੈਟਿੰਗਾਂ ਦੁਬਾਰਾ ਜਾਂਚੋ, ਤਾਂ ਜੋ ਉਚਾਈਆਂ, ਆਫਸੈੱਟ ਅਤੇ ਪੈਨਲ ਵੇਰਵੇ ਸਹੀ ਰਹਿਣ।
- Customize ਅਤੇ ਚੈਨਲ ਰਾਹੀਂ ਡਰਾਅਰ ਦੀ ਡੂੰਘਾਈ ਨੂੰ ਕੰਟਰੋਲ ਕਰੋਡਰਾਅਰ ਲਈ ਚੈਨਲ ਦੀ ਡੂੰਘਾਈ ਸੈੱਟ ਕਰੋ ਅਤੇ ਸਹੀ ਪੈਨਲ ਮੋਟਾਈ ਅਤੇ ਫਿਲਰਾਂ ਨਾਲ ਇਸਨੂੰ ਕੈਬਿਨੈਟ ਵਿੱਚ ਫਿੱਟ ਕਰੋ।
- ਉਸ ਦਰਾਜ਼ ਬਾਕਸ ਨੂੰ ਠੀਕ ਕਰੋ ਜੋ ਆਪਣੇ ਖੁੱਲ੍ਹਣ ਤੋਂ ਵੱਧ ਉੱਚਾ ਹੈਦਰਾਜ਼ ਬਾਕਸ ਦੀ ਉਚਾਈ ਘਟਾਓ ਜੋ ਦਰਾਜ਼ ਦੇ ਖੁੱਲ੍ਹਣ ਤੋਂ ਵੱਡੀ ਹੈ, ਤਾਂ ਜੋ ਦਰਾਜ਼ ਫਿੱਟ ਹੋ ਜਾਵੇ।
- How drawer systems work in cabinetsLearn how drawer systems are configured at the drawer level, including choosing mechanism types and mixing hardware per drawer.
- Add and configure internal drawers in a wardrobeAdd an internal drawer to a wardrobe by defining the partition height, setting the drawer to internal and box type, and aligning fillers with the shutter thickness.
- Configure external drawer sets with one, two or three drawersAdd external drawers from the subcategory and warehouse, then adjust drawer height, box height and bottom panel offset.
- How drawer-set fillers workLearn how fillers are added to tandem and wooden drawer sets and how each side can be changed on its own.
- Use add drawer set for production-ready wardrobe drawersAdd production-ready drawers inside a wardrobe or cabinet by using the add drawer set option and setting the partition height to fit it.
- Add and size accessory objects in drawersAdd baskets, tandem boxes and other drawer hardware, then size and position them by turning auto-scale on or off.
- Add an internal tandem drawer set and recess it with an offsetAdd a Draw Set to a partition, clear a blocking hinge with a left filler, and recess the drawer by setting its offset from the front.
- Add extra drawers via drawer system customizationAdd more drawers to a cabinet by setting the number of additional drawers in the drawer system customization option.
- Add or change drawer fillers from Drawer System construction settingsAdd left or right fillers to a drawer, set their width, and remove the one that clashes in sliding-shutter units.
- Choose a drawer filler typePick between both-side, left-side and right-side filler when you add drawers.
- Configure drawer channel via draw level customizationSet the drawer channel from the draw level in the channel library, then adjust its width and depth.
- Convert a drawer to a wire basket or add a cutlery tray insertChange a drawer into a wire basket or add a cutlery tray insert, choosing sizes that match the cabinet.
- Convert a full-height shutter into drawersTurn a full-height shutter into drawers by removing it from the shutter system and adding drawers at partition level.
- Create an internal drawer by turning off fascia and extending shutterAdd a normal drawer, turn off its fascia so it has no front, then extend the shutter fascia above it to cover the opening.
- Fix drawer height errors and drawers that hit the carcassUnfix affected drawers so the system recalculates, and reduce box height when a drawer collides with the carcass.
- Make a drawer internal and box type in drawer systemsConvert a newly added external drawer into an internal drawer and size the space it sits in to match the drawer height.
- Set a custom drawer depth with a channel fittedUse the Depth Reduction in the drawer's Other Parameters to make a drawer shallower than the cabinet while a channel stays fitted.
- Set and change a filler's width on the drawer systemAdd a left or right filler from the cabinet's drawer system and set how much space it takes by editing its Filler Width.
- Set box drawer parameters and channelsSet the bottom panel offset and default drawer depth per wardrobe, and add a channel matching the drawer depth.
- Size tandem drawers and box drawersLet the tandem brand/model specification set the bottom and back panel sizes, and know where drawer depth is editable.
- Tell internal and external drawers apart by placementLearn how internal and external drawers differ by where they sit, and how drawers can be added with both-side, left-side or right-side fillers depending on the wardrobe type.
- Work out drawer depth from the selected channelTrace how the drawer depth follows the channel depth minus the Depth Reduction, and why the channel is chosen manually.
- Add a drawer set from the partition's quick access menuAdd external or internal drawers to a partition and place LHS and RHS drawer sets side by side correctly.
- Add a handle at drawer level with the drawer handle selectorAssign a handle to a single drawer, or to several cabinets at once, without touching placement or orientation settings.
- Add a telescopic channel to a drawerAdd a telescopic runner to a drawer by choosing the telescopic option from the channel list in the cabinet's customize middle section.
- Add drawers by selecting the partition, not by undoingAdd one or more drawers to a unit by selecting the partition where each drawer should sit and entering the quantity.
- Add drawers individually or as drawer setsAdd drawers one at a time or as pre-measured drawer sets, created in Admin under Furniture > Drawer Sets.
- Add drawers on both sides of a unitAdd a vertical panel first, then add the drawers on each side so drawers can sit on both sides of the unit.
- Add fillers to a drawer system with hinged shuttersAdd fillers to a drawer system used with hinged shutters so the parts do not collide, then trim the default three panels to suit.
- Add or re-add drawer accessories at drawer levelOpen the drawer system and drawer construction at drawer level to add accessories such as tandem hardware.
- Add or remove drawers from drawer system customizationAdd extra drawers at system level or remove a single drawer at drawer level.
- Apply a channel at drawer-system or drawer levelChoose whether a channel applies to every drawer in a system or to a single drawer, and re-check widths on drawers modelled without channels.
- Assign a drawer channel from the drawer channel dropdownChoose the drawer channel for a cabinet from the drawer channel dropdown in the drawer settings.
- Build drawer and basket units at partition levelAdd drawers and baskets at the internal partition level and size them to match the partition.
- Change drawer depth from 450 to 400Change the default drawer depth in the cabinet design module to 400 depending on the channel used.
- Choose drawer filler options on the shutter sideWhen configuring a drawer, choose fillers on both sides, a left-side filler or a right-side filler.
- Edit drawer depth in box and other drawer constructionsChange the drawer depth in box drawer construction through the editable Default Drawer Depth value, while other constructions keep the Drawer Depth field disabled.
- Position the drawer and fascia with offsetsSet the offset to a specific value and place the fascia where you want it rather than only at the bottom.
- Set drawer heights, front panel reduction and carcass 1mm reductionConfigure the drawer settings structure and drawer-level construction with the required heights, then set the front panel reduction at drawer level.
- Add drawer sets to sliding wardrobesConfigure drawer sets for a sliding wardrobe in your design.
- Add or remove drawers from a partition via drawer system controlsAdd drawers to a partition from the partition section and remove them from the drawer system, while also adding shelves or vertical partitions.
- Apply and remove drawer handles per drawerConfigure each drawer with its own handle instead of one common handle for the whole unit.
- Apply a shelf reveal of 20 or 25 to the shutter spaceApply a shelf reveal of 20 or 25 to the shutter space so the shelves and partitions are set before you add a drawer set.
- Create side-by-side drawers by insetting the vertical panelSplit a section into halves with a fixed shelf and vertical, assign a drawer set to each half, then hide the vertical by moving the panel inward.
- Customize drawer height, channel and bottom panel thicknessAdjust the drawer height, channel settings and bottom panel thickness so the drawer construction matches the required dimensions.
- Drawer bottom elevation is 12 and construction setting is 20Connectors are already present in the construction.
- How drawer depth is derived from the constructionLearn why the drawer channel properties show Channel Depth, Channel Width and partition depth but no drawer depth field, and where drawer depth comes from instead.
- How drawer fronts behave over a split verticalLearn how a drawer front spans a vertical when a drawer set sits in one half of a split section, and how it changes once the other half gets one.
- How drawers default to internal or externalLearn which drawers are internal or external by default and how to switch a drawer between the two.
- How the drawer bottom panel is grooved into the drawer sidesLearn how Infurnia grooves the drawer bottom panel into the drawer sides, including the four-sided grooving used in wooden drawer construction.
- Set left and right filler widths for box-type drawer constructionSet an editable Left Filler Width and Right Filler Width alongside the filler gap in the drawer-system construction area, and these fillers and widths apply to box-type drawer construction as well.
- Set the section height for a drawer above a shutterAdd a shelf at partition level and set the section height so the drawer above a shutter comes out at the height you want.
- Add side-by-side drawers with a vertical partitionCreate side-by-side drawers by placing one vertical partition between them and sizing it to the drawer height.
- Compare tandem box and none drawer panel constructionSee which wooden panels a tandem box drawer has and which a none drawer has.
- Configure tandem drawer system and set box heightCreate a one-drawer drawer set, switch it to a tandem internal drawer, and set its facial and box height at drawer level.
- Control drawer front position with offset valuesSet the offset values to control how the drawer front sits relative to the cabinet opening.
- Convert a drawer into a keyboard tray by turning off fasciaTurn off the fascia option in the drawer level settings so the drawer front is removed and the unit reads as an open keyboard tray.
- Position a drawer box with bottom elevation and bottom panel offsetRaise the drawer box above the shutter bottom with bottom elevation and fine-tune the bottom panel with its offset, remembering that the offset reduces the drawer box height.
- Set drawer tandem hardware at drawer levelChoose the tandem or drawer hardware for a drawer unit from the drawer level, using the SKUs configured in the catalogue.
- Size a drawer to fit a carcass with a back panelWork out the usable internal depth of a carcass so a drawer fits without hitting the back panel.
- Understand default 1 mm cabinet reductionsLearn how every cabinet is reduced by 1 mm on all four sides under drawer-level construction by default.
- Work out usable drawer depth in a wardrobeSize a wardrobe drawer by subtracting the shelf reveal, back panel offset, back panel thickness and drawer fascia thickness from the cabinet depth.
- Add Drawers vs Drawer Set, and normal vs box type drawersLearn how Add Drawers spreads drawers equally within a partition and how normal drawers adjust to partition height.
- Apply box construction with channels to a drawer systemCreate a drawer set with channels on the admin portal, then switch the construction dropdown to Box Type at drawer level.
- Change drawer channels in the design portal with multi-selectSelect multiple items in the design portal and change their drawer channels in one go.
- ਦਰਾਜ਼ ਪੈਨਲ ਤੋਂ ਦਰਾਜ਼ ਫੈਸੀਆ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਬਦਲੋਦਰਾਜ਼ ਪੈਨਲ ਤੋਂ ਵੱਖਰਾ ਦਰਾਜ਼ ਫੈਸੀਆ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਚੁਣੋ।
- Clone a configured drawer to replicate its settingsUse cloning to copy a configured drawer's construction, channel, accessories and settings across a drawer system.
- Create a handleless drawer using a finger groove cutApply a profile or gola handle from the handle options when you want a handle instead of a finger groove cut.
- Create side-by-side drawers manually with a vertical partitionBuild side-by-side drawers by adding a shelf and a vertical partition, then placing a drawer on each side.
- Drawer heights auto-fit within available clear heightDrawer heights auto-fit to the available clear height of the cabinet opening.
- Find TV base and TV drawer units in multi-purpose modular furnitureLocate TV base and TV drawer units, in single or double door and short, 450 or 600 heights, under the multi-purpose modular furniture section.
- How changing a drawer accessory type rebuilds the drawerLearn what happens to a drawer when you change its accessory type, including how fascia reduction values and tandem changes are handled.
- See which drawer inputs a channel or tandem item locksFind out which drawer inputs become read-only once a channel or tandem box item declares its own dimensions.
- Set front panel and bottom panel extensionsSet the front panel extension and per-side bottom panel extension in the drawer construction preferences.
- Set per-drawer top and bottom reductions in drawer modulesConfigure drawer modules with individual top and bottom reduction values for each drawer instead of one value for the whole module.
- Set the drawer system deduction to 2 mm for more clearanceIncrease the drawer system deduction from its 1 mm default to 2 mm so the drawer gets more clearance and moves more easily.
- Toggle drawer side panels on or off via panel visibility settingsShow or hide a drawer's side panels by selecting the drawer and using its panel visibility options.
- Understand tandem drawer bottom thickness and drillingTandem drawer bottom panels are handled automatically at the standard 18mm thickness, and applying a tandem drawer system generates its drilling automatically.
- Add a basket to a drawer in an insert collectionAdd the drawer first, then apply the basket option, keeping in mind that a basket cannot be combined with tandem box drawers in the same insert collection.
- Add a drawer by attaching it to a shelf in the space partitionPlace a drawer inside a compartment by first adding a shelf at the required height and then attaching the drawer to that shelf in the space partition.
- Add a drawer insert such as PVC cutlery from drawer levelAdd an insert like a PVC cutlery tray to a drawer by picking its type and the size closest to the drawer.
- Add drawers at any height in a wardrobeAdd a drawer at the top of a wardrobe without being limited by the module's height.
- Add internal drawers behind wardrobe shuttersAdd drawers on a partition and switch the new Drawer System's Properties > Type to Internal so the drawers sit behind the shutters.
- Adjust non-standard drawer sizes with an extension valueFit drawers to non-standard openings by applying an extension value to match the client's requirements.
- Adjust panel-level reduction to resize an external drawerChange the panel-level reduction parameter with a minus value to make an external drawer larger.
- Bulk edit drawer carcass thickness and set defaultSet the drawer carcass thickness for all drawers at once, knowing individual drawers can still be overridden later if a different thickness is needed.
- Change drawer facial configuration in drawer system settingsOpen the drawer system settings and change the facial configuration there to update a drawer.
- Change drawer runners to ball-bearing via drawer-level CustomizeSelect an individual drawer, go to the drawer level and use Customize to change its channel to another runner type such as ball-bearing.
- Choose between normal and box drawers in a drawer systemLearn how a normal drawer auto-calculates its balance space and how to switch a drawer type back to normal.
- How pull-out drawer width is reduced by channel widthLearn how a pull-out drawer's width is reduced by twice its Default Channel Width, and how tandem box drawers take their side gap from the tandem box instead.
- Restore a drawer's 1:1 ratio by setting height back to autoSwitch a drawer's height from fixed back to auto-calculated to return it to the original 1:1 ratio.
- ਇਸਦੇ ਇਨਸਰਟ, ਬਾਸਕਟ ਜਾਂ ਉਚਾਈ ਨੂੰ ਬਦਲਣ ਲਈ ਇੱਕ ਡਰਾਅਰ ਚੁਣੋਡਰਾਅਰ ਕੰਪੋਨੈਂਟ ਨੂੰ ਹੀ ਚੁਣੋ ਤਾਂ ਜੋ ਇਨਸਰਟ, ਬਾਸਕਟ ਅਤੇ ਉਚਾਈ ਲਈ ਇਸਦੇ ਕੈਟਾਲਾਗ ਵਿਕਲਪ ਦਿਖਾਈ ਦੇਣ।
- Set default drawer height and channel lengthConfigure a standard drawer height default with its matching internal drawer body, and set the default drawer channel length in the admin hardware drawer sets.
- Switch a drawer back to auto-sizing to free the fixed-height constraintTurn off a drawer's fixed-height switch so it returns to auto-sizing and another drawer can take a fixed height.
- Understand the standard cabinet drawer division ratioLearn the drawer division ratio used for a standard cabinet with a normal handle.
- Understand the three editable drawer levelsLearn how a drawer is split into the drawer system level, the drawer level and the panel level, each editable on its own.
- Understand what a two-drawer medium unit providesLearn what a two-drawer medium unit gives you in kitchen drawer units.
- Use drawer sets instead of manual construction for side-by-side drawersBuild side-by-side drawer layouts with the drawer sets feature so channels and components stay consistent.
ਸ਼ੈਲਫ, ਪਾਰਟੀਸ਼ਨ ਅਤੇ ਅੰਦਰੂਨੀ ਹਿੱਸੇ87
- ਵੰਡਾਂ, ਸ਼ੈਲਫਾਂ ਅਤੇ ਦਰਾਜ਼ ਪ੍ਰਣਾਲੀਆਂ ਵਰਤ ਕੇ ਵਾਰਡਰੋਬ ਦਾ ਅੰਦਰੂਨੀ ਹਿੱਸਾ ਬਣਾਓਵਾਰਡਰੋਬ ਦੀਆਂ ਵੰਡਾਂ ਦੇ ਅੰਦਰ Add shelves, ਦਰਾਜ਼ ਪ੍ਰਣਾਲੀਆਂ ਅਤੇ ਬਣਾਵਟ ਦੇ ਵਿਕਲਪ ਵਰਤ ਕੇ ਇਸ ਦਾ ਅੰਦਰੂਨੀ ਹਿੱਸਾ ਬਣਾਓ।
- Build a wardrobe internal with shelves, drawers and hanger rodsAdd a shelf, drawer, vertical, hanger rod and pull-out hanger rod in the right order to build a wardrobe internal.
- Change partition dimension instead of translating a shelfAdjust a cabinet by manipulating partition levels, add a shutter system at the partition level, and avoid translating a shelf so the shelf still matches the partition layout.
- Add drawers, shutters and shelves at partition levelAdd a drawer set, shutter system or shelf at partition level and set each drawer's height and accessory type and the shutter mechanism.
- Add wardrobe internals, drawer sets and mirrorsComplete a wardrobe interior by adding vertical partitions, shelves, hanging accessories, drawer sets and shutter mirrors.
- Adjust shelf reveal at partition or panel levelChange the shelf reveal at partition level or move a single shelf's front edge at panel level so internal shelves clear a clash.
ਸਭ ਵੇਖੋ (87)
- Set shelf reveal to zero for external shutters and drawersSet the shelf reveal to zero so external shutters and drawers are not offset by the internal shelf spacing.
- Set wardrobe shelf and hinge reveals larger than 5 mmChoose a shelf reveal large enough that wardrobe shelves and hinges do not collide, then check it against the hinge positions.
- Add shelves in a partition and set shelf reveal to zeroAdd shelves to a selected partition space and set the shelf reveal to zero so there is no gap from the front side.
- Build wardrobe internals yourself from an empty carcassPlace a wardrobe option from the catalogue and build its internals yourself using shelves and vertical panels or a ready-made partition configuration.
- Set drawer fascia height by adjusting partition dimension with a negative offsetSee how the partition height shown is the full height minus the panel thickness when you set drawer fascia height with a negative offset.
- Add a vertical partition and drawers on either sideChoose which side a vertical partition goes on, then add and configure drawers on each side once the vertical and shelves are in place.
- Align a shelf between a shutter and a drawerLearn where a shelf sits by default between a shutter and a drawer and how to shift its alignment by adjusting the extension.
- Lock a partition section and set its heightSwitch a partition section to fixed, give it exact dimensions and add fixed shelves at that level.
- Set shelf reveal and front gap to zero for flush shelvesEdit the shelf reveal and the front gap in the shelf/panel construction settings on the left-hand panel to make shelves sit flush.
- Set shelves above and below drawers as fixedSet the shelves above and below the drawers in a wardrobe as fixed rather than adjustable.
- Set shelves as fixed or adjustableChoose Fixed Shelf or Adjustable Shelf per shelf panel and mix fixed and adjustable shelves in one unit.
- Use pre-made internal configurations that auto-resize to the wardrobeAdd internal wardrobe configurations through the customize option and adjust one shelf height to let the remaining shelves resize automatically.
- Work with separate partitions in a wardrobeSelect each partition of a divided wardrobe on its own so you can add a shutter to just one zone or change its shelves without touching the others.
- Add shelves and hanging space by clicking on partitionsClick a partition to add shelves and hanging space inside a wardrobe, and plan around drawers at the bottom.
- Configure hinge dimensions for hinge-shelf collision detectionConfigure the dimensions for every hinge type individually so hinge-shelf collisions can be detected.
- Customize wardrobe partitions, shelves and zonesArrange partitions, shelves and zones to match the customer's requirement, including long hanging space or a drawer configuration.
- Manually change wardrobe construction and turn off back skirtingCustomize a wardrobe by manually changing its construction and turning off the back skirting for a sliding wardrobe.
- Set fixed height to control partition division and add drawersDivide a cabinet partition with a shelf or vertical partition, set a fixed height on a section to size it, then add a hanging rod or shelf.
- Set shelf reveal on partitionsSet the partition-level shelf reveal distance and control how it applies to nested and SKU partitions.
- Split an L-corner partition into Front Major or Side MajorSplit the L-corner partition, add shelves to each section and align the panel dimensions.
- Understand partitions and add shelves, panels or drawers inside a cabinetLearn what a partition is in Infurnia and add shelves, vertical panels or drawers at the partition level.
- Why a shelf or partition cannot be deletedLearn why a shelf or partition panel may be protected from deletion and how to work around it.
- Add a hanging route via construction customizeAdd a hanging route to a wardrobe by opening construction customization on the top, selecting the hanging route option and picking it from the catalogue.
- Add partitions and glass inside a cabinet zoneSplit a cabinet interior equally by adding a partition in the empty space inside the cabinet zone.
- Add shelves, shutters and hangers at partition levelAdd components to a selected partition so they apply only to that portion of the cabinet.
- Build the internal layout partition by partitionAdd shelves, vertical partitions, drawers and accessories on a partition basis in the right order.
- Change a shelf from adjustable to fixedShelves added at partition level start out adjustable, and you can make one fixed by changing its type at panel level.
- Choose a predefined partition configurationPick a ready-made layout whose filler side matches the requirement instead of dropping individual units.
- Choose fixed or adjustable shelves in shelf panel settingsDecide whether each shelf stays permanently in position or can be removed and repositioned, and set shelves as fixed for a clean drawer look.
- Choose how to add shelves so halves stay independent or equally dividedLearn how adding shelves one at a time versus all at once changes whether sections stay independent or re-adjust equally when you edit them.
- Create and reuse fixed wardrobe module layoutsSet up wardrobe modules as fixed layouts so their arrangement stays the same across drawings.
- Dimension internal cabinet partitions with skeleton modeTurn on skeleton mode to add internal partition dimensions, or dimension partitions by hand instead.
- Divide shelf and vertical spaces equally or by exact dimensionAdd shelves and verticals that split space equally by default, or select a space and enter an exact dimension to divide it unequally.
- Edit wardrobe width, height and depthChange a wardrobe's width, height and depth and let the internal layout adjust automatically.
- Find wardrobe hangers for a hanging sectionLocate wardrobe hangers as an accessory under the partition level in the hanging section, where non-branded hangers are already available in the store.
- Handle back panels and bulk shelf revealTurn off an oversized carcass back panel and apply one shelf reveal across several wardrobes.
- How adjustable shelves are sized differently from fixed shelvesLearn why adjustable shelves are made slightly narrower than fixed shelves and how that changes when a shelf is set to fixed.
- How partition sections are auto-sized and lockedUnderstand how auto and fixed partition sections share space and why one section always stays auto.
- How the default shelf reveal distance worksLearn what the shelf reveal distance is set to by default and why you note it when creating catalogue entries.
- Front shift ਨਾਲ ਪਾਰਟੀਸ਼ਨਾਂ ਅਤੇ ਪੈਟਰਨਾਂ ਨੂੰ ਕੰਧ ਤੋਂ ਅੱਗੇ ਖਿਸਕਾਓਕੰਧ ਤੋਂ ਅੱਗੇ ਇੱਕ ਆਫਸੈੱਟ ਸੈੱਟ ਕਰੋ ਤਾਂ ਜੋ ਪਾਰਟੀਸ਼ਨਾਂ, ਰਾਫਟਰ ਅਤੇ ਖਿੱਚੇ ਗਏ ਪੈਟਰਨ ਤੁਹਾਡੀ ਲੋੜੀਂਦੀ ਦੂਰੀ 'ਤੇ ਹੋਣ।
- Remove vertical partition before adding a shelf in the structurePlace a shelf where a vertical partition currently sits by removing the partition first, adding the shelf, then returning to the vertical partition step.
- Set a partition to fixed height to change its heightMake one partition taller or shorter by switching it to fixed height and entering the height you need.
- Set custom partition sizes using fixed width or fixed heightGive a partition its own size by switching it from equal division to a fixed width or fixed height and entering the value you need.
- Set partition width and height using internal-to-internal measurementSet a wardrobe partition's width or height by its internal-to-internal measurement so you control the clear opening between panels.
- Set the partition offset distance inside a carcassLearn what the partition offset value means when you add a partition inside a carcass, so you inset the partition by a distance instead of setting its thickness.
- Split top and bottom panels per vertical partitionSplit a cabinet's top and bottom panels into one piece per vertical section so each piece follows its section width and edge pieces extend over the sides automatically.
- Use quick presets to add standard internal layoutsPick a ready-made internal layout preset and add fillers on either side of it.
- Add a hanger rod via the customize button, not quick accessAdd a hanger rod to your design by choosing it and using the house button.
- Add a ready-made internal layout to a cabinet partitionGive a client ready-made internal options by adding a pre-made layout to a cabinet partition, then fine-tune individual panels.
- Add a shelf above a shutter by hiding the appliance and using the partitionAdd the shelf at the partition level so it matches the arrangement used in similar units.
- Add a shell and verticals to an empty wardrobe carcassAdd a shell and verticals to an empty wardrobe carcass, then find the partition options in the selection tree on the left-hand side.
- Add base and loft shelves via partition dimensions using clear heightSet the base shelf from clear height and add a second shelf to divide the loft and fix its height from the top partition dimensions.
- Add fixed shelves at partition level using switch to fixedAdd a fixed shelf at a partition level with a specific height by using 'Switch to Fixed Height' on the partition section rather than on the shelf panel.
- Add hanger rod and pull-out rod via partition-level customizationOpen partition-level customization for a wardrobe section and add a hanger rod and pull-out rod to its internals.
- Add hanger rods and props to cabinetsAdd hanger rods through partition-level customization and add props so they become part of the cabinet.
- Add partition configuration for double-shutter wardrobes with both-side fillerAdd a partition configuration from partition level under construction for a double-shutter wardrobe, choosing from default configurations such as left-side, right-side and both-side filler.
- Adjust panel front thickness at shelf or individual panel levelSet shelf and panel reveals in millimetres to position shelves and panels precisely from the carcass front.
- Change drawer channels and drawer sets across several unitsLearn where a wardrobe partition's Quick Access sections sit, how to edit partition drawer settings in bulk, and how to swap drawer channels on several units at once.
- Configure shelves through preferencesSet shelf settings in preferences so newly created designs already have them applied and need no manual shelf setup.
- Control sub-partition ratios explicitlySwitch a partition to auto-adjusted height and turn sub-partition ratio on or off, knowing that clearing ratios needs your consent.
- Create a slot in a full-height wardrobe via custom wardrobesSet the column configuration so the wardrobe geometry changes to create the slot you need.
- Delete a parent partition to remove all its child shelves at onceDelete a parent partition and the system removes its top and bottom partitions and their child partitions together.
- Edit cabinet partitions from the bottom so the top partition auto-adjustsEdit the lower cabinet partitions and let the remaining height be calculated automatically for the top partition.
- Find wardrobe modules in partition internals on the admin portalLocate the wardrobe modules that are available under partition internals in the admin portal.
- How wardrobe internals sit under the parent partitionLearn how the parent partition sits at the top of a wardrobe and holds every sub-partition, shelf, drawer system and other internal beneath it in the hierarchy.
- Load a saved partition configuration onto a partitionOpen the 'Partition Configuration' dropdown on a partition and apply a saved configuration, checking it fits the section.
- Make inside shelf fixed and set shutter materialSet the inside shelf of a cabinet as a fixed panel and reduce it 20 mm from the front.
- Place a single vertical partition at the centre of a unitAdd one vertical panel to a unit and it positions at the centre automatically, then adjust the distance manually if the placement is slightly off.
- Position a partition panel using partition height, depth and shelf revealPlace a horizontal partition panel by adding a custom panel, rotating it, and setting its left-right dimension and X and Y positions.
- Read a previously set loft height from the top partition's parent partitionRecover a forgotten loft height by opening the top partition of the reference wardrobe and checking its parent partition.
- Read the blue highlight to know your working level in a cabinetLearn what the blue highlight in the 3D view tells you about the partition level you are currently working on.
- Set a standard wardrobe height of 2100 mmUse 2100 mm as the standard height when you design a wardrobe.
- Set sub-partition ratio on the immediate parent to equalise childrenGive child partitions equal heights by setting the sub-partition ratio on their immediate parent partition.
- ਸ਼ੈਲਫ ਐਨੋਟੇਸ਼ਨ ਡਿਫਾਲਟ ਰੂਪ ਵਿੱਚ ਸਕੈਲੀਟਨ ਵਿਊ ਵਿੱਚ ਦਿਖਦੇ ਹਨਸ਼ੈਲਫ ਐਨੋਟੇਸ਼ਨ ਡਿਫਾਲਟ ਰੂਪ ਵਿੱਚ ਸਕੈਲੀਟਨ ਵਿਊ ਵਿੱਚ ਅਡਜਸਟੇਬਲ, ਫਿਕਸਡ ਅਤੇ ਗਲਾਸ ਸ਼ੈਲਫਾਂ ਨੂੰ ਨਿਸ਼ਾਨਿਤ ਕਰਦੇ ਹਨ, ਅਤੇ ਤੁਸੀਂ ਇਹਨਾਂ ਨੂੰ LHS ਪ੍ਰਾਪਰਟੀ ਪੈਨਲ ਤੋਂ ਬੰਦ ਕਰ ਸਕਦੇ ਹੋ।
- Shelves and partitions do not accept negative sizing valuesShelves and partitions in the design module cannot be given negative sizing values.
- Split a cabinet back panel using construction default partition settingsSelect a cabinet and use its construction default partition options to split the back panel or add a vertical divider.
- Understand fixed and adjustable shelf dimensionsSee how a fixed shelf runs end to end while an adjustable shelf is reduced on both sides.
- Understand how parent partition numbers are assignedLearn why parent partition numbering in a wardrobe shifts depending on which partition or shelf you click.
- Understand partition selection levels in a cabinetSee how clicking a partition highlights the clicked part and its parent level so you can tell which level of the cabinet you selected.
- Understand what a wardrobe partition isLearn how the empty internal space of a wardrobe carcass is divided into parts and what the blue area represents.
- Use an invisible shelf to adjust partition height for drawersAdd a shelf, hide it, and use it to set partition height for drawer systems without a physical shelf.
ਕਾਊਂਟਰਟਾਪ, ਸਕਰਟਿੰਗ ਅਤੇ ਪੈਨਲ199
- Control edgeband selection, linking and visibilityLearn how edgeband is auto-selected by rules, linked to finishes, removed by profiles and shown on the 3D model.
- ਫਿਨਿਸ਼ ਲਾਉਣ ਤੋਂ ਪਹਿਲਾਂ ਪੈਨਲਾਂ ਉੱਤੇ ਐਜ ਬੈਂਡ ਸੈੱਟ ਕਰੋਕੈਟਾਲਾਗ ਵਿੱਚ ਐਜ ਬੈਂਡ ਐਂਟਰੀਆਂ ਬਣਾਓ, ਹਰ ਪੈਨਲ ਜਾਂ ਸ਼ਟਰ ਉੱਤੇ ਹਰ ਪਾਸੇ ਲਈ ਉਹਨਾਂ ਨੂੰ ਨਿਰਧਾਰਤ ਕਰੋ, ਅਤੇ ਪੈਨਲ ਪੱਧਰ ਦੀਆਂ ਸੈਟਿੰਗਾਂ ਤੋਂ ਇੱਕ ਕਿਨਾਰੇ ਦਾ ਫਿਨਿਸ਼ ਬਦਲੋ।
- ਪੈਨਲ ਪੱਧਰ 'ਤੇ ਦਿਖਣ ਵਾਲੇ ਅਤੇ ਨਾ ਦਿਖਣ ਵਾਲੇ ਐਜਬੈਂਡ ਮੁੱਲ ਸੈੱਟ ਕਰੋਪੈਨਲ ਦੇ ਅਗਲੇ ਕਿਨਾਰੇ ਅਤੇ ਬਾਕੀ ਪਾਸਿਆਂ ਨੂੰ ਆਪਣੇ ਐਜਬੈਂਡ ਮੁੱਲ ਦਿਓ ਤਾਂ ਜੋ ਹਰ ਪਾਸਾ ਇੱਛਤ ਢੰਗ ਨਾਲ ਮੁਕੰਮਲ ਹੋਵੇ।
- ਸਮਝੋ ਕਿ ਕੈਬਿਨੈੱਟ ਦੀ ਚੌੜਾਈ, ਡੂੰਘਾਈ ਅਤੇ ਉਚਾਈ ਵਿੱਚ ਕੀ ਸ਼ਾਮਲ ਨਹੀਂ ਹੈਜਾਣੋ ਕਿ ਸ਼ਟਰ, ਕਾਊਂਟਰਟਾਪ ਅਤੇ ਸਕਰਟਿੰਗ ਵਰਗੇ ਕਿਹੜੇ ਹਿੱਸੇ ਦਿੱਤੇ ਮਾਪਾਂ ਤੋਂ ਵੱਖਰੇ ਤੌਰ 'ਤੇ ਜੋੜੇ ਜਾਂਦੇ ਹਨ।
- Materials > Edgeband ਅਧੀਨ ਭੂਮਿਕਾ ਅਨੁਸਾਰ ਕੈਬਿਨੈਟ ਦੇ ਐਜ ਬੈਂਡ ਚੁਣੋMaterials > Edgeband ਅਧੀਨ ਹਰ ਐਜ ਬੈਂਡ ਨੂੰ ਉਸ ਦੀ ਭੂਮਿਕਾ ਅਨੁਸਾਰ ਚੁਣੋ ਅਤੇ Edgeband Linking ਸੈੱਟ ਕਰੋ ਤਾਂ ਜੋ ਕਾਰਕਸ ਅਤੇ ਸ਼ਟਰ Internal Finish ਜਾਂ External Finish ਦੀ ਪਾਲਣਾ ਕਰਨ।
- ਪੈਨਲ ਨੂੰ ਟਾਰਗਿਟ ਡੈਪਥ, ਪਿੱਛੇ ਜਾਂ ਅੱਗੇ ਤੱਕ ਵਧਾਓਸਹੀ ਐਕਸਟੈਂਸ਼ਨ ਮਾਤਰਾ ਦਰਜ ਕਰੋ ਤਾਂ ਜੋ ਪੈਨਲ ਟਾਰਗਿਟ ਡੈਪਥ ਤੱਕ ਪਹੁੰਚੇ, ਪਿੱਛੇ ਤੱਕ ਜਾਵੇ ਜਾਂ ਕਾਰਕਸ ਤੋਂ ਅੱਗੇ ਨਿਕਲੇ।
ਸਭ ਵੇਖੋ (199)
- ਪੈਨਲ ਪੱਧਰ 'ਤੇ ਇੱਕ ਸ਼ਟਰ ਨੂੰ ਓਵਰਰਾਈਡ ਕਰੋਕੈਬਿਨੈਟ ਦੇ ਬਾਕੀ ਹਿੱਸਿਆਂ ਨੂੰ ਪ੍ਰਭਾਵਿਤ ਕੀਤੇ ਬਿਨਾਂ ਇੱਕ ਸ਼ਟਰ ਨੂੰ ਆਪਣਾ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਅਤੇ ਫਿਨਿਸ਼ ਦਿਓ।
- ਕਾਰਕਸ 'ਤੇ ਬੈਕ ਪੈਨਲ ਆਫਸੈੱਟ ਸੈੱਟ ਕਰੋ ਅਤੇ ਜਾਂਚੋਕਾਰਕਸ ਪੱਧਰ 'ਤੇ ਬੈਕ ਪੈਨਲ ਆਫਸੈੱਟ ਸੈੱਟ ਕਰੋ ਅਤੇ ਪੈਨਲ ਦੇ ਪਿੱਛੇ ਬਚਣ ਵਾਲੀ ਖਾਲੀ ਥਾਂ ਪਤਾ ਕਰੋ।
- ਪੈਨਲ ਪੱਧਰ 'ਤੇ ਪੈਨਲ ਨੂੰ ਸੋਧ ਕੇ ਬੈਕ ਪੈਨਲ ਦੀ ਮੋਟਾਈ ਬਦਲੋਇੱਕ ਬੈਕ ਪੈਨਲ ਨੂੰ ਮੋਟੀ ਕਾਰਕਸ ਮੋਟਾਈ ਦਿਓ, ਜਿਵੇਂ ਆਈਲੈਂਡ ਰਸੋਈ ਲਈ 18 mm, ਉਸ ਇੱਕੋ ਪੈਨਲ ਨੂੰ ਪੈਨਲ ਪੱਧਰ 'ਤੇ ਸੋਧ ਕੇ।
- ਕਾਰਕਾਸ ਤੋਂ ਬਾਹਰ ਸ਼ਟਰ ਵਿਸ਼ੇਸ਼ਤਾਵਾਂ ਵਾਲਾ ਐਂਡ ਪੈਨਲ ਸ਼ਾਮਲ ਕਰੋਕੈਬਿਨੈਟ ਵਿੱਚ ਐਂਡ ਪੈਨਲ ਸ਼ਾਮਲ ਕਰੋ ਤਾਂ ਜੋ ਕਾਰਕਾਸ ਤੋਂ ਬਾਹਰ ਸ਼ਟਰ ਦੀਆਂ ਵਿਸ਼ੇਸ਼ਤਾਵਾਂ ਵਾਲਾ ਦਿਖਣ ਵਾਲਾ ਤਿਆਰ ਸਾਈਡ ਪੈਨਲ ਬੈਠੇ।
- ਕੈਬਿਨੈੱਟ ਸੈਟਿੰਗਾਂ ਵਿੱਚ ਕੈਬਿਨੈੱਟ ਸਕਰਟਿੰਗ ਸੰਰਚਿਤ ਕਰੋਕੈਬਿਨੈੱਟ ਸੰਰਚਨਾ ਵਿੱਚ ਕੈਬਿਨੈੱਟ ਸਕਰਟਿੰਗ ਦੇ ਵਿਕਲਪ ਲੱਭੋ।
- ਪੈਨਲ ਦੇ ਕਿਨਾਰੇ ਨੂੰ ਐਕਸਟੈਂਸ਼ਨ ਪੈਰਾਮੀਟਰਾਂ ਨਾਲ ਵਧਾਓ ਜਾਂ ਘਟਾਓਪੈਨਲ ਦੇ ਕਿਨਾਰੇ ਨੂੰ ਲੰਬਾ ਜਾਂ ਛੋਟਾ ਕਰਨ ਲਈ ਚਾਰ ਦਿਸ਼ਾਵਾਂ ਵਾਲੇ ਐਕਸਟੈਂਸ਼ਨ ਖੇਤਰ ਵਰਤੋ, ਜਿਸ ਵਿੱਚ ਰਿਣਾਤਮਕ ਮੁੱਲ ਵੀ ਸ਼ਾਮਲ ਹਨ।
- ਵਾਧੂ ਕੈਟਾਲਾਗ ਯੂਨਿਟਾਂ ਤੋਂ ਬਿਨਾਂ ਕੱਚ ਦੇ ਸ਼ਟਰ ਵਰਤੋਹਰ ਕੱਚ ਦੀ ਕਿਸਮ ਲਈ ਵੱਖਰੀ ਕੈਟਾਲਾਗ ਯੂਨਿਟ ਬਣਾਏ ਬਿਨਾਂ ਸ਼ਟਰਾਂ ਨੂੰ ਕੱਚ ਵਿੱਚ ਬਦਲੋ ਅਤੇ ਸ਼ੈਲਫਾਂ ਨੂੰ ਕੱਚ ਦੀਆਂ ਬਣਾਓ।
- Apply one edge band to every panel in a cabinetAdd an edge band at the cabinet level so it is applied to every panel in that cabinet.
- Create a curved cabinet with a custom panel and panel design editsBuild a curved cabinet by adding a custom panel at cabinet level, sizing it from carcass parameters, and adjusting its offsets so it sits correctly.
- Make a panel follow the shutter finishPoint a panel's external finish source at Shutter External so it updates with the shutter colour.
- ਇੱਕ ਯੂਨਿਟ ਉੱਤੇ ਸਕਰਟਿੰਗ ਦੀ ਕਿਸਮ ਅਤੇ ਉਚਾਈ ਸੈੱਟ ਕਰੋਹਰ ਯੂਨਿਟ ਲਈ ਲੱਕੜੀ ਜਾਂ ਗੈਰ-ਲੱਕੜੀ ਸਕਰਟਿੰਗ ਚੁਣੋ ਅਤੇ construction ਵਿਕਲਪਾਂ ਤੋਂ ਸਕਰਟਿੰਗ ਦੀ ਉਚਾਈ ਸੈੱਟ ਕਰੋ।
- Handle skirting buffer, curved panels and shutter depthAbsorb the site buffer at the skirting, model a curved corner as one panel and cover the front including shutter thickness.
- How back panel groove offset and extension are configuredLearn how a grooved back panel's offset from the panel edge and its extension depth are defined and where to set them.
- How hinge quantities are generated for carcass and shutter panelsLearn why hinges are counted from the interaction between a carcass panel and a shutter panel, and what happens when the carcass panel is turned off.
- ਕੈਬਿਨੈਟ ਪੈਨਲ ਵਿੱਚ ਸਪਾਟਲਾਈਟ ਜਾਂ ਸਟ੍ਰਿਪ ਲਾਈਟ ਸ਼ਾਮਲ ਕਰੋ ਅਤੇ ਇਸਦਾ ਲਾਈਟ ਸਰੋਤ ਸੈੱਟ ਕਰੋਕੈਬਿਨੈਟ ਪੈਨਲ ਵਿੱਚ ਸਟ੍ਰਿਪ ਲਾਈਟ ਜਾਂ ਸਪਾਟਲਾਈਟ ਸ਼ਾਮਲ ਕਰੋ, ਸਪਾਟਲਾਈਟ ਨੂੰ ਲਾਈਟ ਸਰੋਤ ਦਿਓ ਅਤੇ ਇਸਦੀ ਸਥਿਤੀ ਸੈੱਟ ਕਰੋ, ਅਤੇ ਲੋੜ ਨਾ ਹੋਣ 'ਤੇ ਕੋਈ ਵੀ ਲਾਈਟ ਹਟਾ ਦਿਓ।
- Add grooving to custom and other panelsLearn where grooving is added automatically and how to specify it for custom panels and change back panel grooving across all units at once.
- Apply edge bands from the design portalApply edge bands to your cabinets from the design portal.
- Create a construction style to apply the same edge band across panelsCreate a construction style so the same edge band applies across different panels, then fine-tune it per element.
- Create curved panel edges with fillet and panel thickness cutGive a panel a curved edge with the fillet tool, set cuts to panel thickness cut, and mirror the treatment to the opposite side.
- Add custom support panels and set back panel offset and groovingAdd a support panel with its own core material, finish and label, and configure the back panel offset and grooving depth in the extension parameters.
- Add hardware to custom panels with rules and connectorsCover custom panels with hardware rules, or add connectors manually where rules do not reach.
- Add strip lights at panel levelAdd a strip light to the bottom panel and set its reference, then repeat for other panels such as the left one.
- Add strip light to a wall unit panel and set its colourLight a wall unit by adding a strip light to its panel, choosing front or back, and setting the colour in the design's Lights preferences.
- Clone and modify filler panels for both sides of a cabinetClone a filler panel and modify it so each side of a cabinet gets its own filler.
- Create a cutout in a shutter via panel-level edit panel designCut a shape out of a shutter by drawing it in panel-level edit panel design and setting it to cut through the panel thickness.
- Cut shapes into a panel using Cut instead of ExtrudeDraw a shape on a panel face and use Cut instead of Extrude to make a cut-out or groove at the depth you need.
- Extend a panel down to the floor instead of skirtingMake a panel continue to the floor instead of showing skirting by using the extension parameters in its construction settings.
- Extend a panel using the construction tabGrow a panel on its left, right, front or back side by entering an extension value in the construction tab.
- Model curved cabinetry with curved custom panelsLearn how curved custom panels let you model curved cabinetry cases, and why standard carcass panels cannot be curved.
- Replace a countertop finish using the Replace buttonChange the finish of a countertop by selecting its units and picking a new option from the Replace list.
- Set the default back panel groove to 5 mmSet the default back panel grooving to 5 mm so back panels are grooved at that depth by default.
- Apply a shaped edge or beading profile via Edit Panel DesignOpen the panel's Edit Panel Design option and change its profile to apply a shaped edge or beading profile.
- Change skirting finish independently of shutterGive the skirting of a skirting wardrobe its own finish instead of the shutter's default.
- Change skirting height by changing the hardwareChange a unit's skirting height by swapping the fixed-height PVC skirting hardware, commonly 100 mm or 150 mm.
- Create a cut in a panel using edit panel design and offset rectangleCut a panel by drawing the cut shape and moving its edge with the offset rectangle while keeping the panel outline intact.
- Drive panel extensions and offsets with parametersBind extension, offset and cutout values to design parameters so panels update automatically when the model changes.
- Match partition shelf reveal to SKUs and drawersRead how partition configuration SKUs and drawer placement depend on the partition shelf reveal value.
- Rotate grain orientation on individual panels in designControl the grain direction on specific panels by setting the grain orientation on the panel in the design module and rotating the grain on each panel as needed.
- Round a panel corner via panel-level construction edit shapeGive a panel or shelf a rounded corner by selecting it, choosing edit shape in panel-level construction, picking the sides to curve and entering a radius.
- Understand sink unit rails and skirting optionsLearn how sink units are built with top and back rails and how to turn skirting on or off from the cabinet skirting options.
- Add side fillers and extend panels to alignAlign a panel by checking its front side at panel level construction and setting the front depth extension to the shutter panel thickness.
- Add strip light and spotlight to wall cabinet bottom panelLight a wall cabinet by adding a strip light and a spotlight to its bottom panel.
- Add strip lights to a panel and set reference and positionAdd a strip light to a panel, set its Reference and Position offset, and repeat for each panel or add more lights to the same panel.
- Apply one countertop to several units with Modify CountertopSelect several cabinets and set their countertop thickness and material together in one pop-up.
- Change countertop material and thickness from the Countertop menuPick the countertop material and set its thickness, either following the material SKU or entering a value yourself.
- Changing countertop thickness does not auto-change the top panelLearn why the top panel of a kitchen base unit stays a rail panel when you change the countertop thickness.
- Create a custom panel with cutouts using construction edit panel designAdd a vertical panel with its height, width and core material thickness set, draw the cutout geometry in construction edit panel design, and assign the cut to the panel.
- Extend the back panel at Construction levelNavigate to the Construction level to extend the back panel.
- Find a through cut on the face it was made onFlip to the face where a cut was created to see or edit it, since each panel face is handled independently and through cuts otherwise show only in the 3D view.
- Fix skirting height so panels adjust automaticallyChange the skirting height value so the overall height re-applies and the panel adjusts without manual edits.
- Inset back skirting between side panels or side skirtingAdd a back skirting so it sits inset between the side panels or side skirting, letting the side panels close the skirting ends.
- Modify countertop and handles from the properties panelSelect units to change their countertop material and thickness or swap their handles from the properties panel.
- ਐਕਸਿਸ ਅਤੇ ਕਾਊਂਟਰਟਾਪ ਲੈਵਲ ਦੀ ਵਰਤੋਂ ਕਰਕੇ ਹੌਬ ਅਤੇ ਸਿੰਕ ਕੰਪੋਨੈਂਟ ਰੱਖੋਹੌਬ ਨੂੰ ਇਸਦੇ Furniture/Light Unit ਲੈਵਲ 'ਤੇ XYZ ਐਕਸਿਸ ਨਾਲ ਰੱਖੋ ਅਤੇ ਕਾਊਂਟਰਟਾਪ ਲੈਵਲ 'ਤੇ Sink ਵਿਕਲਪ ਨਾਲ ਸਿੰਕ ਸ਼ਾਮਲ ਕਰੋ।
- Remove or switch off panels on a single cabinetChange a unit's construction carcass settings so unneeded panels are removed only for that placement.
- Resize cabinet end panel at design panel level, not admin portalChange a cabinet end panel's depth in the design phase at the panel level so the change applies only to the cabinet you are working on.
- See a panel's type in the design portalSelect a panel and open its info option to see the panel name and panel type.
- Set end panel depth to carcass level for open unitsStop the end panel at carcass level on a top unit that has no shutter so it aligns with the carcass.
- Set strip light position per panel to avoid collisionDefine the strip light position on each panel as a distance from the front or back edge so lights avoid collisions.
- Add a horizontal custom panel at cabinet level and rotate itAdd a top panel to a cabinet using cabinet-level custom panel, then add a horizontal custom panel and place it anywhere.
- Add custom panels to a drawer system and map them as carcass materialAdd custom panels at the drawer system level and set their material at any panel level to map them as carcass material.
- Add profiles to a shelf via panel section constructionPut a profile on a shelf by adding it from the panel section's construction/top settings on the required side.
- Add strip lights to a panel and set their side, orientation and positionAdd a strip light from the selected panel's panel options, then move it to the other face, choose Horizontal or Vertical, and shift it along the panel.
- Apply multiple laminates on one panel using Edit Panel DesignGive a single panel more than one laminate or material by adding shapes over the areas that need a different finish.
- Change construction options that affect production and pricingAdjust how carcass panels extend, connect and rail so the construction tab changes carry through to production outputs and pricing.
- Change countertop material via selection tree or unitChange a countertop's material by selecting the unit or using the selection tree, then choosing a subcategory and a specific material or colour.
- Control wardrobe side panel visibilityControl whether the side panels of a wardrobe are shown.
- Create custom panel designs with extrude, offset move, fillet and cutDraw and shape a custom panel design, round its corners and cut a through opening.
- Create trim and groove designs on a shutter with Extrude and CutPull a drawn region forward with Extrude or recess it by a cut depth to build trim and groove-style designs on a shutter.
- Customise a panel via Edit Shape or Edit Panel DesignChange the outer shape of a panel, for example from a rectangle to a circle or ellipse, or add edge curves.
- Edge banding and materials for cut shapes in Edit Panel DesignLearn how cut shapes in Edit Panel Design can carry edge banding and take a material for the intended finish.
- Edit panel design to add cutouts and rotate panelsCreate cutouts such as back-panel grooving and rotate panels when needed by editing the panel design.
- Extend a panel side using the R handleExtend a panel by a specified amount, such as 100 mm, using the R handle.
- Extend the bottom panel to cover a gap where the skirting breaksSelect the panel and extend it to cover the gap where a separate skirting would otherwise break.
- Fix a panel dimension so it stops resizing with the unitSet a panel length, depth or height to a fixed value so resizing the cabinet or wardrobe leaves that panel size unchanged.
- How custom panels are listed under cabinetsLearn which cabinet a custom panel is listed under depending on where you add it.
- Link back panel core material to carcass core materialLink each back core material to its matching carcass core material in cabinet preferences so the back panel core applies by default across all cabinets.
- Make a backlit panel using a box-type filler behind a plain panelBuild a backlit panel by adding a box-type filler behind a plain front panel and placing strip lights inside it.
- Offset a cabinet bottom panel inward using carcass panel thicknessRaise a bottom panel by one panel thickness so it sits inside the carcass instead of below the side panels.
- Reduce skirting size using negative back extension on skirting panelShrink a skirting run and fit side panels around the skirting by applying negative extensions in the panel editor.
- Set an exposed side panel on a unitOpen the unit at panel level and change the panel to an exposed panel, since it cannot be set as a unit-level default.
- Set recessed skirting using depth offset in skirting optionsRecess the skirting from the front shutter by entering a depth offset value in the skirting options.
- Understand front and side panels in wardrobe skirting constructionLearn how the front panel and the side panel are built in wardrobe skirting construction.
- ਪੈਨਲ ਦੀਆਂ ਵਾਧਾ ਦਿਸ਼ਾਵਾਂ L, R, B ਅਤੇ F ਨੂੰ ਸਮਝੋਜਾਣੋ ਕਿ ਚਾਰ ਵਾਧਾ ਦਿਸ਼ਾਵਾਂ L, R, B ਅਤੇ F ਕਿਵੇਂ ਕੰਮ ਕਰਦੀਆਂ ਹਨ ਅਤੇ ਕਿਵੇਂ ਕਿਸੇ ਪਾਸੇ ਦਾ ਰਿਣਾਤਮਕ ਮੁੱਲ ਪੈਨਲ ਨੂੰ ਉਸ ਪਾਸੇ ਤੋਂ ਘਟਾਉਂਦਾ ਹੈ।
- Understand the automatic 7 mm back panel grooveThe back panel groove is always 7 mm and comes correctly in the design without any manual change.
- Why skirting and pelmet options depend on base or wall unitsLearn how a cabinet's mounting plane sets it as a base or wall unit and which skirting, pelmet, cornice and rail options that unlocks.
- Add a backsplash from countertop level settingsAdd a backsplash as a countertop-level modification, set its height and shift it up, and keep it from running behind the tiles.
- Add a custom ply panel using custom panel furniture optionPlace a custom ply panel on the floor, size it, and check it in 3D view.
- Add a groove to a panel and set its CAM operation typeEdit a panel's shape to add a groove with a specified depth, then include it in the CAM section to set its operation type, such as routing.
- Add a hob to a countertopSelect the countertop and pick a hob from the library to place it at countertop level.
- Add a parametric custom panel inside a unit via constructionAdd a horizontal top panel inside a unit and drive its size and position with parametric formulas.
- Add a vertical gola profile between two cabinetsSelect both cabinets and open the properties menu on the left side to add a vertical gola profile between them.
- Add countertop drops and extensions per sideExtend the countertop on chosen sides and switch on drops with a height so the extension aligns with the design.
- Add custom horizontal or vertical panels from the furnish optionFill gaps such as the space between loft and wall units with custom add-on panels sized and placed using the axis controls.
- Add grooves, cuts and extrusions to panelsUse the Edit Panel Design tool to draw a shape on a door or panel and cut or extrude it into aesthetic patterns or custom cutouts.
- Add handles and profiles to panel hardwareAdd handles under the handle section and select the required profile from the list.
- Add or remove an end panel from cabinet constructionAdd or remove a left or right end panel on a selected unit from its cabinet construction settings.
- Apply bulk changes to multiple selected unitsSelect only the units that should share a change, then edit their common properties once so the change applies to every selected unit.
- Apply handle profiles and add fillersApply handle profiles and add fillers to customize your panels.
- ਪੈਨਲ ਸਟ੍ਰਿਪ ਲਾਈਟ ਦੀ ਦਿਸ਼ਾ ਬਦਲੋਉਹ ਪੈਨਲ ਖੋਲ੍ਹੋ ਜਿਸ ਵਿੱਚ ਸਟ੍ਰਿਪ ਲਾਈਟ ਸ਼ਾਮਲ ਕੀਤੀ ਗਈ ਸੀ ਅਤੇ ਉਸ ਪੈਨਲ ਦੀਆਂ ਸਟ੍ਰਿਪ-ਲਾਈਟ ਸੈਟਿੰਗਾਂ ਵਿੱਚ ਇਸਦੀ ਦਿਸ਼ਾ ਨੂੰ ਹਰੀਜ਼ਾਂਟਲ ਅਤੇ ਵਰਟੀਕਲ ਵਿਚਕਾਰ ਬਦਲੋ।
- Change edge binding for skirting at panel levelGive a skirting area its own edge binding, different from the shutter, by changing it at panel level.
- Check strip light placement on a panel against its depth and heightConfirm that the configured depth and height values are correct as entered so a strip light sits on top of a panel regardless of depth.
- Create a center cutout in a panelDraw the cutout shape, position it with click-and-move, then set the panel to cut through at panel thickness.
- Create drawer cutouts via panel design with parametric formulasDraw a rectangle on a carcass panel in panel design and drive its edges with parameters so drawer openings update automatically.
- Create grooves using offset copy with cut propertySet the groove depth and mark it as a cut so the software recognises the depth in the final design.
- Cut shapes into a panel with a closed boundaryDraw a closed boundary shape, mark it as a cut and set the cut depth so the software knows where to cut the panel.
- Edit a panel's shape with Change Length, Shift Edge and OffsetReshape a panel outline in Edit Shape and use Offset in Edit Panel Design to add a frame inside it.
- Edit countertop accessories at furniture levelAccessories added onto a countertop, such as a hob or sink, are handled at the Furniture/Light Unit level rather than cabinet level.
- Edit panel designs in the construction sectionEdit panel designs in the construction section to reduce panel sizes and add custom shapes or cutouts defined as cuts with specified dimensions.
- ਸਕਰਟਿੰਗ ਪੈਨਲ ਲਈ ਮੈਨੁਅਲ ਡਾਇਮੈਨਸ਼ਨਿੰਗ ਚਾਲੂ ਕਰੋਪਸੰਦਾਂ ਵਿੱਚ ਮੈਨੁਅਲ ਡਾਇਮੈਨਸ਼ਨਿੰਗ ਚਾਲੂ ਕਰੋ ਤਾਂ ਜੋ ਤੁਸੀਂ ਸਕਰਟਿੰਗ ਪੈਨਲ ਨੂੰ ਡਾਇਮੈਨਸ਼ਨ ਕਰ ਸਕੋ।
- ਪੈਨਲਾਂ ਨੂੰ ਹੱਥੀਂ ਮਾਪ ਲਗਾਉਣ ਲਈ Annotate Align ਵਰਤਣ ਦੇ ਯੋਗ ਬਣਾਓਉਹ ਪਸੰਦ ਚਾਲੂ ਕਰੋ ਜੋ ਪੈਨਲਾਂ ਨੂੰ Annotate Align ਵਰਤਣ ਦਿੰਦੀ ਹੈ, ਤਾਂ ਜੋ ਤੁਸੀਂ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਉੱਤੇ ਹੱਥੀਂ ਮਾਪ ਲਗਾ ਸਕੋ।
- Find the countertop brightness and glossiness settingsSelect the countertop to open its level and see which controls it offers.
- Hide or delete carcass panels via panel-level visibilitySwitch off a single carcass panel from the cabinet's Construction > Carcass > Carcass Panels Visibility.
- How extrusion and cut differ on a panelLearn how extrusion projects outward from a panel surface while a cut carves into it, either as a through cutout or to a set depth.
- How wardrobe side panels reach the floorLearn how wardrobe side panels run full length to the floor and why a cutout is made for the front skirting.
- How wardrobe width affects the top panelLearn when a wardrobe uses a single top panel and when its width splits the top panel into two SKUs.
- Identify a selected panel by its Panel IDWhen you select a panel, the left panel shows several identifiers, and the Panel ID is the last one shown.
- Match countertop shift-up value to its heightKeep a countertop or backsplash at the right elevation by setting its shift-up to match its height.
- Offset an extruded face with front shiftShift the front face of an extruded shape by a distance to offset a panel relative to another layer.
- Offset a panel boundary by a set distanceOffset a panel boundary from the outer edges to get a uniform margin on all sides without measuring manually.
- Place a sink on a counter, not a slanted panelPlace sinks only on counters such as granite, and use a manually inserted plumbing fixture when you need one on a slanted or angled panel.
- Place plants on countertops manuallyPlace appliances like hobs on the countertop, but replace or position a plant manually.
- Read entered vs cutlist panel dimensionsSee why a panel's editable dimension can differ from the value that goes to the cutlist and board layout.
- Set a custom cabinet panel to a curved shapeGive a custom horizontal panel a curved shape and set its flat lengths, radius and arc angle so its width follows the expanded length.
- Set a wardrobe's skirting optionsSet the skirting for a wardrobe unit with its Skirting Options, choosing which planks show and how tall the skirting is.
- Set groove depth tolerance from the admin portalAdjust the depth of a groove without changing the panel width by adding a groove depth tolerance in the admin portal.
- Trim a side panel to match an angled top using Edit panel designAdjust a side panel so it matches the angle of a custom angled top panel using Edit panel design or Edit shape.
- Understand how panel extension is measuredLearn that panel extension is calculated from carcass depth plus shutter thickness, with the default system keeping a 2 mm gap between the carcass and the shutter.
- Understand the controls on a selected door's left panelLearn what each control on a selected door's left panel does, from size and shift to flipping sides and hinges.
- Understand why edgeband colour is hidden by defaultLearn why edgeband colour is never visible in an Infurnia design by default, keeping designs with many panels light.
- Use drops as a floor drop or backsplash and raise the countertopSet a drop's height and shift so it reaches the floor, covers the tiling, or lifts the countertop to the required level.
- Add a custom end panel to a cabinetAdd a custom end panel to a cabinet and it extends on whichever side you add it.
- Add a custom horizontal panel sized from carcass width and thicknessAdd a horizontal custom panel inside a cabinet and size it from the carcass width, depth and panel thickness so it aligns correctly.
- ਤਿਰਛੇ ਉੱਪਰ ਵਾਲੇ ਹਿੱਸੇ ਲਈ ਕਸਟਮ ਝੁਕਾਅ ਵਾਲਾ ਪੈਨਲ ਸ਼ਾਮਲ ਕਰੋਤਿਰਛੇ ਉੱਪਰ ਵਾਲੇ ਹਿੱਸੇ ਲਈ ਕਸਟਮ ਝੁਕਾਅ ਵਾਲਾ ਪੈਨਲ ਸ਼ਾਮਲ ਕਰਨ ਲਈ ਲੋੜੀਂਦਾ ਝੁਕਾਅ ਗਿਣੋ ਅਤੇ ਪੈਨਲ ਦਾ ਆਕਾਰ ਉਸ ਅਨੁਸਾਰ ਵਧਾਓ।
- Add a custom panel for non-standard sizesAdd a custom panel when a shelf or partition needs a size or placement that standard sizing parameters cannot produce.
- Add a custom vertical panel via Furnish > Panels and apply a laminate finishCreate a custom vertical panel by choosing its material and finish, then setting its dimensions.
- Add and size a custom panel on a cabinetAdd a custom panel from a cabinet's Construction tab, then set its shape, dimensions and position, using expressions of unit parameters when the panel sits inside a unit.
- Add bottom support panels under a wardrobeSet the count and height of bottom support panels from the cabinet's Carcass options and check them in the cutlist.
- Add countertop ply under graniteAdd a ply support panel under the countertop with its own thickness and materials, and remove it again when not needed.
- Add custom panels for non-standard rails and supportsAdd, copy and shape custom panels inside a cabinet to place rails and supports where the standard structure provides none.
- Add horizontal or vertical panels and shelves with custom panelUse the custom panel option to place a horizontal or vertical panel and turn it into a shelf inside the cabinet.
- Add skirting and extra end panels from cabinet constructionConfigure skirting on a unit and add an extra left or right end panel from the cabinet's Construction tab.
- Add stability rails to a cabinet and let the system space themSelect a cabinet, add the number of stability rails your standards call for, and let the system space them evenly across the back.
- Assign panel types to split skirting segmentsGive split skirting segments the panel types that let hardware and connector rules tell them apart from unsplit skirting.
- Calculate the finished elevation of a cabinetAdd cabinet height, skirting height and countertop thickness to get the total elevation for aligning elements.
- Change a filler panel's type and dimensions from its propertiesCorrect a filler panel by editing its dimension in its properties or by replacing it with a filler of the right type.
- Change construction and shutter options at unit levelApply construction and shutter changes to a single unit and see the difference on its panels.
- Change internal and external color of a storage boxSet a storage box's carcass color and external finish independently using the relevant color controls.
- Check oversized panels by downloading the oversized-panel PDFFind panels that exceed the board size and correct each one in the design.
- Check that panel sizes match the built carcass structureMake sure panel sizes are computed from the carcass configuration actually built and adjust them when it differs.
- Choose between single and top chimney panelsPick the chimney panel variant that gives you just the front or both the front and the top.
- Close a skirting gap with extension parametersClose a gap at the skirting by applying extension parameters to the skirting component.
- Configure front and back skirting on a wardrobeChoose whether a wardrobe has front and back skirting.
- Confirm the half-top panel is false for a full topCheck the half-top panel setting so a full top is built correctly.
- Convert an end panel to an upright from its Construction tabConvert an end panel's own panel on the Construction tab to an upright so it stays in place and gains shelf connector sets and drill holes like an upright.
- Create a headboard design as a custom panel inside a cabinetTurn a cabinet into a headboard by keeping one back panel and adding a tilted custom panel you shape, finish and save.
- Extrude or cut grooves on a panel via Edit Panel DesignCreate grooves or raised shapes on a panel by adding a shape in Edit Panel Design and applying it.
- Fillet or chamfer countertop cornersGive each of the four countertop corners its own rounded or chamfered edge with an entered value.
- Filter panels by type to bulk-select shelves and partitionsFilter the panels list by unit SK name and panel type so you can select many shelves or partitions at once and change their finish in one action.
- Fix laminate that does not resize with panel heightLearn why a manually pasted laminate or colour rectangle stays at a fixed position and size when the panel height changes.
- Fix skirting panels inheriting unexpected materialsWhen a skirting panel picks up the wrong material in every new design, check whether an admin skirting preference is overriding the component's configured inheritance.
- Give stacked panels a front shift equal to the lower panel thicknessGive the upper panel a front shift equal to the thickness of the panel below it so the two surfaces do not overlap.
- Hide carcass panels you do not needToggle panel visibility to hide the carcass panels you do not need.
- How a countertop backsplash changes the slab's back extensionLearn how switching on a countertop's Back drop sets Extension Options > Back to 40 and how to bring the slab edge back to the unit's back.
- How a countertop side's Extension Options value includes its Countertop DropLearn how a side's Countertop Drop is added to its Extension Options value while the slab itself still runs only the set amount past the unit.
- How back and front panel extensions are set in preferencesLearn how the back, front and drawer bottom extensions are configured separately in preferences.
- ਹਾਰਡਵੇਅਰ ਡਰਿੱਲਾਂ ਸਪਲਿਟ ਟਾਪ ਅਤੇ ਬਾਟਮ ਪੈਨਲਾਂ 'ਤੇ ਕਿਵੇਂ ਲੱਗਦੀਆਂ ਹਨਜਾਣੋ ਕਿ ਜਦੋਂ ਕੈਬਿਨੇਟ ਦੇ ਟਾਪ ਅਤੇ ਬਾਟਮ ਪੈਨਲ ਹਰ ਸੈਕਸ਼ਨ ਲਈ ਵੱਖਰੇ ਟੁਕੜਿਆਂ ਵਿੱਚ ਵੰਡੇ ਹੁੰਦੇ ਹਨ, ਤਾਂ ਸ਼ਟਰ-ਮਕੈਨਿਜ਼ਮ ਹਾਰਡਵੇਅਰ ਡਰਿੱਲਾਂ ਕਿਵੇਂ ਰੱਖੀਆਂ ਜਾਂਦੀਆਂ ਹਨ।
- How L-shaped custom panel thickness is derivedLearn which dimensions of an L-shaped custom panel you can set and why its thickness is fixed.
- L-ਕੋਨਰ ਅਤੇ ਪੈਂਟਾਗੋਨਲ ਕੋਨਰ ਪੈਨਲਾਂ 'ਤੇ ਸਟ੍ਰਿਪ ਲਾਈਟਾਂ ਕਿਵੇਂ ਕੰਮ ਕਰਦੀਆਂ ਹਨL-ਕੋਨਰ ਜਾਂ ਪੈਂਟਾਗੋਨਲ ਕੋਨਰ ਯੂਨਿਟ ਵਿੱਚ ਇੱਕ ਸਟ੍ਰਿਪ ਲਾਈਟ ਸ਼ਾਮਲ ਕਰੋ ਅਤੇ ਇਹ ਦੋ ਜੁੜੀਆਂ ਸਟ੍ਰਿਪਾਂ ਬਣ ਜਾਂਦੀ ਹੈ, ਇੱਕ L ਦੀ ਹਰੇਕ ਲੱਤ ਦੇ ਨਾਲ।
- Inset a shelf from left and right using construction offsetsMake a shelf shorter than the full carcass width by entering negative left and right construction offsets.
- Know what applying, removing or replacing a configuration clearsLearn which parts of a partition survive a configuration change and which are removed with it.
- Model rounded forms with the architecture slab toolModel the shape in the architecture slab tool so it stays as modelled and is not treated as a standard cabinet.
- Move a single stability rail or set rail dimensionsOffset one rail to a specific height with Translate Panel and set rail dimensions from the cabinet's construction options.
- Order filler panels wider than the leftover site gapEnter a filler panel width larger than the actual gap in the design, because the panel is produced at the size you enter.
- Place a handle and set its heightPlace a handle of a particular size and specify the height at which it sits.
- Place a separate filler at the side of a unitPlace a separate filler at the side of the unit, where the top panel does not extend to cover it.
- Position a countertop drop and backsplash on the countertopLearn how a countertop drop hangs from the underside of the countertop slab and how to set the shift so a backsplash stands exactly on the countertop.
- Read the yellow and blue bounding boxes when selecting a unitLearn what the yellow and blue bounding boxes mean when you select a unit and what the box measures.
- Remove a shelf from a designSelect the shelf, open its panel-level menu and use the "Delete Shelf" entry, which is greyed out when the shelf is protected by the disallow-deletion setting.
- Remove back panel behind appliances at cabinet levelAppliance units normally have no back panel by default, so no extra step is needed for them.
- Resize or remove sinks and hobs from the selection treeSelect a sink or hob in the selection tree to resize or delete it, since built-in appliances are managed at the countertop level.
- Select a panel profile for a panelOnce profiles are configured, select from the available options for the panel you are designing.
- Set a shelf panel to the Adjustable shelf type with a glass coreSet a shelf panel to the Adjustable shelf type and give it a glass core material such as a tinted glass of a given thickness.
- Set carcass back rail for a rail-based back panelMake a cabinet back panel rail-based instead of a full panel by setting the carcass back rail option.
- Set skirting joint order and remove skirting from pricingChoose which panel sits on top at the skirting joints and exclude any skirting you remove from the pricing quotation and BOQ.
- Set the bottom panel offset to raise the bottom panelSet the bottom panel offset to control the clear gap below the bottom panel and raise it by the side panel height when needed.
- Set up blind corner units and the dummy panelBuild a blind corner unit with a dummy panel between the shutter and non-shutter front panel and set its depth.
- Target the right panel in panel-type conditionsNarrow broad carcass panel conditions to the specific panel so connectors land only where intended.
- Understand built-in carcass thickness parametersLearn which carcass thickness parameters the software creates automatically and which ones you add yourself.
- Understand how a furniture light's panel lists its light sourcesLearn how a furniture light's panel lists each light source by position and what its properties and multi-selection behaviour are.
- Understand sink unit back panels and railsLearn that sink units default to rails at the back instead of a full back panel.
- Use formulas so extensions follow skirting height automaticallyDrive an extension's value with a formula referencing the skirting height so it updates on its own when that height changes.
- Use reduction options to adjust panel left, right, top and bottomSet reductions on the left, right, top and bottom of a panel in the construction panel settings, where the number you enter reduces that panel dimension.
- Use the cutting tool on ceilings, panelling and wardrobe panelsApply the cutting tool to ceilings, panelling and wardrobe panels, not just one surface type.
ਹਾਰਡਵੇਅਰ, ਕਨੈਕਟਰ ਅਤੇ ਨਿਯਮ72
- Add accessory drilling to a panel via panel hardwarePlace an accessory such as a lock on a panel as panel hardware, position it relative to the panel size, and check the drill positions in 2D CAM mode.
- Attach site hardware per cabinet via hardware rulesCreate hardware rules that attach the right hardware to each cabinet and wardrobe, then clean up and activate the rule to set up hinges.
- ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਲਈ ਹਿੰਜ ਬ੍ਰਾਂਡ ਬਦਲੋਹਿੰਜ ਨਿਯਮਾਂ ਅਤੇ ਕਨੈਕਟਰ ਕਾਰਡਾਂ ਦੁਆਰਾ ਸਹੀ ਹਿੰਜ ਵੇਰੀਐਂਟ ਹੱਲ ਕਰਨ ਲਈ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਦੇ ਅੰਦਰ ਹਿੰਜ ਬ੍ਰਾਂਡ ਸੈੱਟ ਕਰੋ।
- Add a multi-purpose lock from panel hardwareAdd a multi-purpose lock to a cabinet panel and adjust its position afterwards.
- Add corner unit accessories through the shutter systemFix a magic corner or similar accessory to the shutter and get it into the hardware list.
- Edit a connector card to change the whole design and future cabinetsEdit the original connector so the whole design and future cabinets are modified.
ਸਭ ਵੇਖੋ (72)
- Add connectors by admin-portal rules or manuallyAdd connectors either by defining a rule in the admin portal so matching imported cabinets get the rule's connectors automatically, or by adding them manually.
- Add locks, grills and other fittings with Panel HardwareAdd fittings such as locks, ventilation grills, stiffeners and hooks to a selected panel through Panel Hardware instead of separate commands.
- Auto-solve hinge and shelf collisions from the violations listUse the auto-solve option when the violations check reports a collision such as a hinge placed at the same position as a fixed shelf.
- Replace a hinge connector card to use a different hinge typeSelect a different hinge type even when no connector card exists for it.
- ਉਲੰਘਣ ਪੈਨਲ ਤੋਂ ਜਾਂ ਹੱਥੀਂ ਡ੍ਰਿਲ ਟਕਰਾਅ ਹੱਲ ਕਰੋਰਿਪੋਰਟ ਕੀਤਾ ਡ੍ਰਿਲ ਟਕਰਾਅ ਉਲੰਘਣ ਸੂਚੀ ਤੋਂ ਹੱਲ ਕਰਕੇ ਸਾਫ਼ ਕਰੋ, ਫਿਰ ਜੇ ਇਹ ਅਜੇ ਵੀ ਰਹਿੰਦਾ ਹੈ ਤਾਂ ਆਫ਼ਸੈੱਟ ਆਪਣੇ ਆਪ ਸਮਾਯੋਜਿਤ ਕਰੋ।
- ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਵਿੱਚ ਹਾਰਡਵੇਅ ਨੂੰ ਕਨੈਕਟਰ ਵਜੋਂ ਸ਼ਾਮਲ ਕਰੋਹਾਰਡਵੇਅ ਨੂੰ ਸਟੈਂਡਅਲੋਨ ਕੈਟਾਲਾਗ ਆਈਟਮ ਦੀ ਬਜਾਏ ਕਨੈਕਟਰ ਵਜੋਂ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਵਿੱਚ ਸ਼ਾਮਲ ਕਰੋ, ਅਤੇ ਜਦੋਂ ਇਸ ਦਾ ਮੂਲ ਸਪਸ਼ਟ ਨਾ ਹੋਵੇ ਤਾਂ QC mode ਦੇ hardware tab ਵਿੱਚ ਇਸ ਦੀ ਜਾਂਚ ਕਰੋ।
- Change hardware across multiple cabinets with the modify functionChange hardware such as drawer types on several cabinets at once instead of editing each cabinet individually.
- ਉਤਪਾਦਨ ਤੋਂ ਪਹਿਲਾਂ ਹਾਰਡਵੇਅਰ ਟਕਰਾਵਾਂ ਦੀ ਜਾਂਚ ਕਰੋ ਅਤੇ ਹੱਲ ਕਰੋਕਿਸੇ ਪ੍ਰੋਜੈਕਟ ਨੂੰ ਉਤਪਾਦਨ ਲਈ ਭੇਜਣ ਤੋਂ ਪਹਿਲਾਂ collision filter ਨਾਲ ਹਾਰਡਵੇਅਰ ਟਕਰਾਵਾਂ ਦੀ ਜਾਂਚ ਕਰੋ, ਫਿਰ ਮਿਲੀਆਂ ਟਕਰਾਵਾਂ ਦਾ ਹੱਲ ਕਰੋ।
- Check hardware and materials in QC ModeUse QC Mode to verify each unit's hardware and materials against the design-wide raw materials list before production.
- Choose cabinet-level or global connector scenario changesDecide whether a connector scenario change should affect only the selected cabinets or the whole project by choosing where you open the connector settings.
- How automation rules work: applicability, conditions and actionsLearn how one rule engine with applicability, conditions and actions powers design constraints, hardware rules, manufacturing rules and design automation.
- How hinge count and position change with cabinet heightLearn how hardware rules set hinge count and placement by cabinet height range and update them automatically when height changes.
- Link the correct SKU and set quantity and type for connectorsWhen editing connector properties, link the correct SKU within the hardware category and set the quantity and type, such as nylon sockets or double twisters.
- Set and edit hinge positions within defined rangesConfigure hinge positions in the admin portal, then adjust them within the defined ranges in the connector card editor.
- Understand how scenarios list carcass and meeting panelsLearn how a scenario names the carcass panel first and the panel it meets second, with the meeting side given as a face.
- Use a panel type condition to differentiate shutter variants in hardware rulesGive a special shutter variant its own panel type so a hardware rule can tell it apart without the shutter design tag.
- Use X-ray mode to inspect internal hardware componentsSwitch on X-ray mode to make internal hardware such as minifix components visible so you can check and verify them during construction review.
- Apply and change handles on unitsApply gola or profile handles through Modify Handle and change handles on several units at once.
- Bulk-edit hinge positions across multiple shutters via scenario viewUse the scenario view flow to bulk-edit hinge positions across multiple shutters, and apply the same flow to replace one hinge type with another.
- Check which hardware rules apply to a cabinet via admin portalFind the hardware rules that apply to a cabinet and look up their conditions and the hardware they add.
- Clear panel collisions with Solve CollisionsUse the Solve Collisions option to automatically clear many panel collisions.
- Clone a connector card for existing cabinets onlyClone a connector card to create a modified version that applies only to existing cabinets.
- Create a hinge custom scenario between an internal panel and shutterSet the connector source to manual, then create the scenario connector and add the relevant connector card, such as a blind corner connector.
- Edit connector card spacing per cabinet in single unit panel cam modeChange the connector card spacing for one cabinet only, without affecting any other cabinet.
- Find hardware from hardware rules in outputs and BOQLearn where the hardware your org's hardware rules give a cabinet is listed, and what decides which rules reach a custom panel.
- How carcass connectors are identified and adjusted automaticallyLearn how the cabinet software identifies carcass connectors for you and adjusts their position and quantity as panel variables change.
- How default hinge configuration assigns hingesLearn how the system automatically assigns hinges when the designer does not explicitly specify them.
- How hinge scenario length is calculatedLearn that a hinge scenario's length is the common intersected length between the two panels it connects.
- ਸਟ੍ਰਿਪ-ਲਾਈਟ ਕੀਮਤ ਅਤੇ ਆਟੋਮੈਟਿਕ ਹਾਰਡਵੇਅਰ ਨਿਯਮ ਚੱਲਣ ਵਾਲੀ ਲੰਬਾਈ ਦੀ ਵਰਤੋਂ ਕਿਵੇਂ ਕਰਦੇ ਹਨਜਾਣੋ ਕਿ ਸਟ੍ਰਿਪ ਲਾਈਟਾਂ ਦੀ ਕੀਮਤ ਚੱਲਣ ਵਾਲੀ ਲੰਬਾਈ ਨਾਲ ਕਿਵੇਂ ਲੱਗਦੀ ਹੈ ਅਤੇ ਆਟੋਮੈਟਿਕ ਹਾਰਡਵੇਅਰ ਨਿਯਮ ਉਨ੍ਹਾਂ ਨੂੰ ਪ੍ਰਤੀ SKU ਕਿਵੇਂ ਇਕੱਠਾ ਕਰਦੇ ਹਨ।
- Remove all existing connectors before adding a new connector scenarioEnable the option to remove all existing connectors on the affected panels before adding the required connector, so the new scenario defines the panel's connector set cleanly.
- Remove connectors such as legs from a single cabinetRemove connectors such as legs from one cabinet in its Connectors and Scenarios settings, then correct other units with the same configuration individually or through the default rules.
- Replace unwanted connectors across a design via Connector and ScenariosLearn how changes made in the admin portal apply only to projects created after the change.
- Set a custom panel's panel type so rules applyGive a custom panel the right panel type so panel-type rules and their connectors reach it.
- Set connector placement with rangesSet where connectors go by adding one or more ranges, adding another range when two different ranges are needed, and choosing connector types such as dowel and hinge.
- Component Editor ਵਿੱਚ ਡ੍ਰਿਲ ਓਪਰੇਸ਼ਨ ਵਿੱਚ ਡ੍ਰਿਲ ਦੀ ਡੂੰਘਾਈ ਅਤੇ ਵਿਆਸ ਸੈੱਟ ਕਰੋਕਿਸੇ ਕੰਪੋਨੈਂਟ ਉੱਤੇ ਡ੍ਰਿਲ ਛੇਦ ਨੂੰ ਡ੍ਰਿਲ ਓਪਰੇਸ਼ਨ ਵਜੋਂ ਪਰਿਭਾਸ਼ਿਤ ਕਰੋ ਅਤੇ ਇਸ ਦੇ depth ਅਤੇ diameter ਖੇਤਰ ਸੈੱਟ ਕਰੋ।
- Use filter and solve collisions automatically in single unit modeResolve collisions in single unit mode by running collision detection, filtering to violations and solving them from the right-bottom options.
- Add connector ranges by editing connector and setting size bandsSet a start/end gap and add or subtract an offset within each connector range so the connector is placed correctly for that size band.
- Add connector scenarios to a cabinet panel via bulk restructureAttach hardware connector scenarios to a cabinet panel by importing them from styles through Bulk Restructure.
- Add suspension rail hardware for wall cabinetsAdd suspension rail hardware at the volume level or the scenario level in your design so wall cabinets can be hung.
- ਸਿਰਫ਼ ਚੁਣੇ ਹੋਏ ਸੀਨਾਰੀਓ ਉੱਤੇ ਤਬਦੀਲੀਆਂ ਲਾਗੂ ਕਰੋਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਤਬਦੀਲੀ ਨੂੰ ਉਸ ਸੀਨਾਰੀਓ ਤੱਕ ਸੀਮਿਤ ਰੱਖੋ ਜਿਸ ਵਿੱਚ ਤੁਸੀਂ ਕੰਮ ਕਰ ਰਹੇ ਹੋ, ਤਾਂ ਜੋ ਹੋਰ ਸੀਨਾਰੀਓ ਅਛੂਤੇ ਰਹਿਣ।
- Apply connectors design-wide via preferences or per cabinetApply connectors such as dowels to the whole design from the design preferences, using the connector options that come from the admin portal.
- Attach utility hardware manually at panel level in designAttach utility hardware to a panel by selecting it and adding the item from the panel hardware list.
- Bulk-check missing connectors via cam connectors scenariosSpot junctions with missing connections by finding scenarios that show zero connectors.
- Change a non-standard fitting in the designChange a fitting that differs from the common standard, such as a shelf support instead of a VB fitting, through the Connectors and Scenarios settings so the design carries the right fitting.
- Check connectors and collisions in 3D using X-ray and single unit C modeSpot collisions in X-ray mode and handle exceptions in a single cabinet with single unit C mode.
- Check panel-to-panel connections in single unit cam modeSee every connection scenario between a cabinet's panels, which connector cards each one uses, and the actual drills.
- Create and apply custom connector logic for hardware in bulkReplace or add hardware connectors across a design from the Connectors settings in Manufacturing Settings.
- Find which hardware rule is applied to a cabinetOpen the cabinet and check Construction > Automation History to see which hardware rule added each hardware item.
- Fix rules that miss or overreach on panelsCheck panel type, dimensions and material classification when hardware appears in the wrong place or goes missing.
- ਹਾਰਡਵੇਅਰ ਬੋਰਿੰਗ ਸਿਰਫ਼ ਉਹਨਾਂ ਪੈਨਲਾਂ 'ਤੇ ਦਿਖਦੀ ਹੈ ਜਿੱਥੇ ਹਾਰਡਵੇਅਰ ਲਗਾਇਆ ਜਾਂਦਾ ਹੈਸਮਝੋ ਕਿ ਕੈਬਿਨੈਟ ਵਿੱਚ ਹਾਰਡਵੇਅਰ ਬੋਰਿੰਗ ਪੁਆਇੰਟ ਕਿੱਥੇ ਦਿਖਦੇ ਹਨ ਅਤੇ ਕੋਈ ਉਮੀਦ ਕੀਤਾ ਬੋਰਿੰਗ ਪੁਆਇੰਟ ਕਿਉਂ ਗੁੰਮ ਹੋ ਸਕਦਾ ਹੈ।
- ਆਟੋਮੈਟਿਕ ਟਕਰਾਅ ਸੰਭਾਲਣਾ ਹਾਰਡਵੇਅ ਟਕਰਾਵਾਂ ਨੂੰ ਕਿਵੇਂ ਹੱਲ ਕਰਦਾ ਹੈਜਾਣੋ ਕਿ ਸੌਫਟਵੇਅਰ ਇੱਕ ਛੋਟਾ ਵਾਧੂ ਆਫਸੈੱਟ ਜੋੜ ਕੇ ਕਿਵੇਂ ਹਾਰਡਵੇਅ ਦੀ ਅਜਿਹੀ ਸਥਿਤੀ ਨੂੰ ਹੱਲ ਕਰਦਾ ਹੈ ਜੋ ਕਿਸੇ ਹੋਰ ਐਲੀਮੈਂਟ ਨਾਲ ਟਕਰਾਉਂਦੀ ਹੈ।
- How automation rules run per unit and re-applyLearn how automation rules are evaluated per unit, reset and re-applied on every run, and which units and panels are skipped.
- ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨਰ ਇਨਪੁਟ ਕਿਵੇਂ ਤੈਅ ਕਰਦੇ ਹਨ ਕਿ ਕਿਹੜੇ ਆਟੋਮੇਸ਼ਨ ਨਿਯਮ ਲਾਗੂ ਹੁੰਦੇ ਹਨਜਾਣੋ ਕਿ ਹਰ ਕੈਬਿਨੇਟ ਅਤੇ ਕਾਰਨਰ ਯੂਨਿਟ ਉੱਤੇ ਸਟੋਰ ਕੀਤੇ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨਰ-ਇਨਪੁਟ ਜਵਾਬ ਕਿਵੇਂ ਕੰਟਰੋਲ ਕਰਦੇ ਹਨ ਕਿ ਉਸ ਉੱਤੇ ਕਿਹੜੇ ਆਟੋਮੇਸ਼ਨ ਅਤੇ ਮੈਨੂਫੈਕਚਰਿੰਗ ਨਿਯਮ ਲਾਗੂ ਹੁੰਦੇ ਹਨ।
- How hardware rules fire on custom panelsLearn how a hardware rule targeting a custom panel type fires depending on how the panel is placed and which component and subcomponent conditions you set.
- How panel drill details show connector, hardware SKU and ruleSelecting a panel's drill in a design shows the connector, hardware SKU, applied rule and drill dimensions, and those values can be changed in the admin portal.
- How skirting hardware rules aggregate skirting length per SKULearn how the system totals skirting length per skirting SKU across the whole floor for automatic hardware rules.
- ਫਿੰਗਰ-ਗਰੂਵ ਹੈਂਡਲ ਦੀ ਉਚਾਈ ਕਿਵੇਂ ਸੈੱਟ ਹੁੰਦੀ ਹੈਜਾਣੋ ਕਿ ਫਿੰਗਰ-ਗਰੂਵ ਹੈਂਡਲ ਦੀ ਉਚਾਈ ਕਿੱਥੋਂ ਆਉਂਦੀ ਹੈ ਅਤੇ ਜਦੋਂ ਇਹ ਨਹੀਂ ਹੁੰਦੀ ਤਾਂ ਕੀ ਹੁੰਦਾ ਹੈ।
- Know which dimensions each item type is checked againstLearn which measurements each hardware type compares against its limits when the carousel filters items.
- Place connectors automatically via scenariosSome connectors are placed automatically based on the panel type defined in scenarios.
- Select hardware individually or as a multi-selectApply hardware to a cabinet by selecting items one at a time or several at once.
- Set hardware connector range and quantity in manufacturing settingsAdd multiple range entries, each with its own quantity, so the connector is applied correctly across different panel sizes.
- Trace where hardware comes from in QC mode hardware tabOpen QC mode and use the hardware tab to see which hardware is applied to the design and how each item was added.
- Understand which panel is panel two in hardware drillingLearn which panel is classified as panel two when a drill falls on its edge band.
- Understand why profiles get no drillingsLearn that the system generates drillings only for wooden parts, so profiles never receive drillings.
- Why an automated component rule does not runAn automated rule in the component editor only executes when the geometry it depends on is present in the SKU.
- Why a none shutter mechanism creates no connector scenariosLearn why setting the shutter mechanism to none stops the software from auto-creating connector scenarios.
ਐਲੀਵੇਸ਼ਨ, ਮਾਪ ਅਤੇ ਐਨੋਟੇਸ਼ਨ41
- Generate multi-cabinet elevations and change finishes in bulkOpen a cabinet's 2D Drawings to generate elevations covering several cabinets, then group-select cabinets to change their materials and finishes in one action.
- Understand what elevation auto dimensioning coversSee which cabinet and surrounding elements auto dimensioning measures and which it leaves out.
- Create elevations from a 3D wall and toggle rich or skeleton viewGenerate an elevation from a wall in the 3D view, then switch between rich view and skeleton view and other display modes.
- ਇਹ ਸਮਝੋ ਕਿ ਐਲੀਵੇਸ਼ਨ ਵਿਊਜ਼ ਵਿੱਚ ਕੀ ਸ਼ਾਮਲ ਹੁੰਦਾ ਹੈ ਅਤੇ ਗੁੰਮ ਤੱਤਾਂ ਨੂੰ ਕਿਵੇਂ ਠੀਕ ਕਰਨਾ ਹੈਜਾਣੋ ਕਿ ਐਲੀਵੇਸ਼ਨ ਵਿਊਜ਼ ਕਿਵੇਂ ਕੈਬਿਨੇਟ ਸ਼ਟਰ ਅਤੇ ਦਰਵਾਜ਼ੇ ਆਪਣੇ ਆਪ ਬੰਦ ਕਰਦੇ ਹਨ, ਉਹਨਾਂ ਵਿੱਚ ਕਿਹੜੇ ਤੱਤ ਸ਼ਾਮਲ ਹੁੰਦੇ ਹਨ, ਅਤੇ ਗੁੰਮ ਹੋਈ ਕੋਈ ਵੀ ਚੀਜ਼ ਕਿਵੇਂ ਵਾਪਸ ਲਿਆਉਣੀ ਹੈ।
- Auto dimensioning: per-view behavior and the visible render layer errorLearn how auto dimensioning behaves in elevation and floor plan views, how to add and remove it, and how to fix the visible render layer error.
- Generate internal and external elevations with dimensionsGenerate internal and external elevations that carry dimensions, with skeleton mode and duplicate elevations available while you work.
ਸਭ ਵੇਖੋ (41)
- Show cabinet labels clearly in the floor planEach cabinet shows its number label in the floor plan, and you can add a custom leader-style label when text overlaps other elements.
- ਐਲੀਵੇਸ਼ਨ ਪਸੰਦਾਂ ਵਿੱਚ ਪੈਨਲਾਂ ਦੀ ਮੈਨੁਅਲ ਡਾਇਮੈਂਸ਼ਨਿੰਗ ਚਾਲੂ ਹੋਣ ਦੀ ਜਾਂਚ ਕਰੋਪੁਸ਼ਟੀ ਕਰੋ ਕਿ ਮੈਨੁਅਲ ਡਾਇਮੈਂਸ਼ਨਿੰਗ ਲਈ ਪੈਨਲ ਚਾਲੂ ਕਰਨ ਦਾ ਵਿਕਲਪ ਡਿਫਾਲਟ ਰੂਪ ਵਿੱਚ ਚਾਲੂ ਹੈ ਅਤੇ ਦੇਖੋ ਕਿ ਇਹ ਬੈਕ ਅਤੇ ਕਾਰਕਾਸ ਪੈਨਲਾਂ ਨੂੰ ਕਿਵੇਂ ਪ੍ਰਭਾਵਿਤ ਕਰਦਾ ਹੈ।
- ਕੈਬਿਨੇਟ ਅਤੇ ਆਈਲੈਂਡ ਰਸੋਈਆਂ ਲਈ ਸਹੀ ਐਲੀਵੇਸ਼ਨ ਚੁਣੋਉਹ ਐਲੀਵੇਸ਼ਨ ਢੰਗ ਚੁਣੋ ਜੋ ਤੁਹਾਡੇ ਰਸੋਈ ਲੇਆਉਟ ਨਾਲ ਮੇਲ ਖਾਂਦਾ ਹੈ, ਫਿਰ ਡਰਾਇੰਗ ਵਿੱਚ ਮਾਪ ਜੋੜੋ।
- Dimension units in an elevation with Align DimensionPick a unit's carcass, partitions and shutters by their edges and chain dimensions along the same direction in an elevation.
- Enable shutter and countertop dimensioning in preferencesTurn on the dimension preference for shutters and countertops so those parts become selectable and can be dimensioned.
- ਕੰਧ ਦੀ ਸਤ੍ਹਾ 'ਤੇ ਕਲਿੱਕ ਕਰਕੇ ਐਲੀਵੇਸ਼ਨ ਬਣਾਓਇਸਦਾ ਐਲੀਵੇਸ਼ਨ ਆਪਣੇ ਆਪ ਬਣਾਉਣ ਲਈ ਕੰਧ ਦੀ ਸਤ੍ਹਾ 'ਤੇ ਕਲਿੱਕ ਕਰੋ, ਕਾਲੇ-ਚਿੱਟੇ ਜਾਂ ਰੰਗ ਵਿੱਚ।
- add ਬਟਨ ਨਾਲ ਐਲੀਵੇਸ਼ਨ ਬਣਾਓadd ਬਟਨ ਨਾਲ ਐਲੀਵੇਸ਼ਨ ਬਣਾਓ, ਜੋ ਆਪਣੇ ਆਪ ਵਿਊ ਬਣਾ ਦਿੰਦਾ ਹੈ।
- How opening an elevation view switches your active levelLearn what happens to your active level, version history and view position when you open an elevation view from the views bar.
- How unique labels (C10, P2, S/F prefixes) are assignedLearn how every production-relevant element gets a unique label with a type prefix and how those labels are numbered and used.
- Return to an elevation after leaving itGet back to an elevation you left by switching to 3D or floor plan, either from the wall in 3D or from the list beside 3D.
- ਐਲੀਵੇਸ਼ਨ ਪਸੰਦਾਂ ਵਿੱਚ ਸ਼ਟਰ ਦਿਸ਼ਾ, ਯੂਨਿਟ ਅਤੇ ਸ਼ੈਲਫ ਐਨੋਟੇਸ਼ਨਾਂ ਨੂੰ ਟੌਗਲ ਕਰੋਐਲੀਵੇਸ਼ਨ ਪਸੰਦਾਂ ਵਿੱਚ ਸ਼ਟਰ ਦਿਸ਼ਾਵਾਂ, ਯੂਨਿਟ ਐਨੋਟੇਸ਼ਨਾਂ ਅਤੇ ਸ਼ੈਲਫ ਐਨੋਟੇਸ਼ਨਾਂ ਨੂੰ ਚਾਲੂ ਜਾਂ ਬੰਦ ਕਰਕੇ ਨਿਯੰਤਰਿਤ ਕਰੋ ਕਿ ਕਿਹੜੀਆਂ ਐਲੀਵੇਸ਼ਨ ਐਨੋਟੇਸ਼ਨਾਂ ਦਿਖਾਈ ਦੇਣ।
- Add a custom cabinet label and center it in 3DTurn off the default labels, add your own multileader label with a small arrow head, and place it at the center of the cabinet.
- Colour-code dimensions and annotationsGive dimensions and annotations colours so drawings are easier to read and important items stand out.
- Control which panels manual dimensioning snaps toChoose which panel types manual dimensioning snaps to in elevations by selecting them in the 'Enable panels for manual dimensioning' setting.
- Create and open a wall section elevation from a wall face in 3DClick a wall's face in 3D to select that wall section, then add an elevation of that face and open it from the Wall Section Elevation list.
- Create an electrical drawing view with legible electrical pointsCreate a new elevation and a view from it, then hide furniture or lighten its layer colour so electrical point annotations and measurements stay legible.
- Generate a 3D model from your 2D cabinet layoutPlace cabinets in the 2D design view and switch to 3D to get the 3D model generated automatically from your layout.
- Run auto dimensioning on a locked elevation viewAdd automatic dimensions to a locked elevation view and fill in anything the automation misses by hand.
- Set the default wall elevation view distance for your organisationSet the distance used when opening a wall elevation view once as an organisation-wide default instead of changing it per view.
- Show material colours on elevations with Rich ViewSwitch an elevation to Rich View so the cabinets display the actual materials applied to them.
- Add a reference level in an elevation viewOpen an elevation view and place a reference level at the height you want, then rename it or change its elevation.
- Configure panel and box labels, fields and logo placementSet which per-panel fields print on panel labels and where the organization logo sits on box labels.
- Create a locked section view and add annotationsGenerate a section with the elevation tool, lock it as a view, and add text from the annotate option.
- Create custom or sectional elevations starting from a cabinetStart an elevation from a specific cabinet to create a custom or sectional elevation.
- ਫਲੋ ਪਲਾਨ ਵਿੱਚ ਸ਼ਟਰਾਂ ਅਤੇ ਕਾਊਂਟਰਟਾਪਾਂ ਦਾ ਮਾਪਫਲੋ ਪਲਾਨ ਵਿੱਚ ਸ਼ਟਰਾਂ ਅਤੇ ਕਾਊਂਟਰਟਾਪਾਂ ਦਾ ਮਾਪ ਪੁਆਇੰਟ-ਤੋਂ-ਪੁਆਇੰਟ ਜਾਂ ਲਾਈਨ-ਤੋਂ-ਲਾਈਨ ਕੀਤਾ ਜਾ ਸਕਦਾ ਹੈ; ਲਾਈਨ-ਤੋਂ-ਲਾਈਨ ਤਰਜੀਹੀ ਹੈ।
- Fix incorrect or missing auto dimensionsCheck the dimensioning settings and pick points carefully when auto dimensions come out wrong or absent.
- Get elevation and plan lines generated by defaultLet the design module generate elevation and plan lines so you do not have to draw them from scratch.
- Handle resizing, extensions, and why custom sizes reset when switching handlesOverride a placed handle's width, height and depth, add left/right extensions on profile handles, and see why swapping the handle item resets your customizations.
- Know which View options are enabled in each viewCheck which View menu options are available in the 2D floor plan, in an elevation view and outside an elevation.
- Set slab elevation from the ground floorPlace a slab at the height you want above the ground floor using the Elevation field in the slab tool.
- Show cabinet internals with Skeleton mode in an elevation viewTurn on Skeleton mode in an elevation view to hide the shutters and reveal the cabinet's internal partitions and carcass so you can dimension them directly.
- Switch an elevation from non-rich to rich viewBy default the elevation opens in non-rich (black-and-white) view, and you can switch rich view on.
- ਐਲੀਵੇਸ਼ਨ ਕੈਮਰੇ ਦੇ ਨਾਮਕਰਨ ਅਤੇ ਸੈਟਿੰਗਾਂ ਨੂੰ ਸਮਝੋਜਾਣੋ ਕਿ ਨਵੇਂ ਐਲੀਵੇਸ਼ਨ ਕੈਮਰੇ ਦਾ ਨਾਮ ਉਸਦੀ ਕਿਸਮ ਅਨੁਸਾਰ ਕਿਵੇਂ ਰੱਖਿਆ ਜਾਂਦਾ ਹੈ ਅਤੇ ਇਸਦੇ ਖੱਬੇ ਪੈਨਲ ਅਤੇ View ਟੂਲਬਾਰ ਵਿੱਚ ਕਿਹੜੇ ਕੰਟਰੋਲ ਹਨ।
- Use electrical and plumbing markings and version trackingLearn that electrical and plumbing markings and version tracking are available in the platform.
- Use plane elevation for side, back or section-style viewsPlace a plane elevation symbol on the floor plan to create side, back or section-style views.
ਆਉਟਪੁੱਟ, QC ਅਤੇ ਉਤਪਾਦਨ18
- Which panels are silently excluded from cutlist and production outputsLearn which panels drop out of cutlists, board layouts and production outputs while staying in the 3D design, and how to switch them off deliberately.
- ਪ੍ਰੋਡਕਸ਼ਨ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਕਾਪੀ ਨਾਲ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਅਤੇ ਪ੍ਰੋਡਕਸ਼ਨ ਤਬਦੀਲੀਆਂ ਨੂੰ ਵੱਖਰਾ ਰੱਖੋਵੱਖਰੀ ਪ੍ਰੋਡਕਸ਼ਨ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਕਾਪੀ ਵਰਤੋਂ ਤਾਂ ਕਿ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਟੀਮ ਅਤੇ ਪ੍ਰੋਡਕਸ਼ਨ ਟੀਮ ਇੱਕ ਦੂਜੇ ਦਾ ਕੰਮ ਓਵਰਰਾਈਟ ਕੀਤੇ ਬਿਨਾਂ ਕੰਮ ਕਰ ਸਕਣ।
- ਕੱਟ ਦੀ ਮੋਟਾਈ ਨੂੰ ਪੈਨਲ ਦੀ ਮੋਟਾਈ ਦੇ ਬਰਾਬਰ ਸੈੱਟ ਕਰੋ ਅਤੇ CAM ਵਿੱਚ ਸ਼ਾਮਲ ਕਰੋਪੈਨਲ ਉੱਤੇ ਕੱਟ ਬਣਾਓ ਜਿਸਦੀ ਮੋਟਾਈ ਪੈਨਲ ਦੇ ਬਰਾਬਰ ਹੋਵੇ ਅਤੇ include in CAM ਵਿਕਲਪ ਚਾਲੂ ਹੋਵੇ ਤਾਂ ਜੋ ਕੱਟ CAM ਆਉਟਪੁੱਟ ਤੱਕ ਪਹੁੰਚੇ।
- Check violations before generating outputsRun the violation checks that flag sizing, SKU and design-rule problems before pricing, production files and schedules are generated.
- ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਨੂੰ ਲਾਕ ਕਰਕੇ ਫ੍ਰੀਜ਼ ਕਰੋ, ਫਿਰ QC ਤੋਂ ਬਾਅਦ ਮਨਜ਼ੂਰੀ ਦਿਓProject Hub ਤੋਂ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਨੂੰ ਲਾਕ ਕਰੋ ਤਾਂ ਜੋ ਜਾਂਚ ਦੌਰਾਨ ਕੋਈ ਬਦਲਾਅ ਨਾ ਹੋਵੇ, ਫਿਰ QC ਪੂਰਾ ਹੋਣ 'ਤੇ ਇਸਨੂੰ ਮਨਜ਼ੂਰੀ ਦਿਓ।
- Check a design for violationsSee whether the Violations option reports anything for your design, since a clean design shows no violations.
ਸਭ ਵੇਖੋ (18)
- Check manually added hardware in the BOQ, CAM and 3D viewManually added hardware appears in the BOQ but may not affect the CAM output or the 3D view.
- SU ਸ਼ਾਰਟਕੱਟ ਨਾਲ Single Unit CAM Mode ਦਰਜ ਕਰੋਪੈਨਲ ਲਈ Single Unit CAM Mode ਖੋਲ੍ਹਣ ਵਾਸਤੇ ਪ੍ਰੋਡਕਸ਼ਨ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਵਿੱਚ SU ਕੀਬੋਰਡ ਸ਼ਾਰਟਕੱਟ ਵਰਤੋ।
- Export 3D ਜਿਓਮੈਟਰੀ glTF ਵਜੋਂ ਅਤੇ ਐਲੀਵੇਸ਼ਨ DWG ਵਜੋਂਕੰਧਾਂ, ਦਰਵਾਜ਼ਿਆਂ ਅਤੇ ਖਿੜਕੀਆਂ ਨੂੰ glTF 3D ਮਾਡਲ ਵਜੋਂ ਐਕਸਪੋਰਟ ਕਰੋ, ਅਤੇ DWG ਸਿਰਫ਼ ਐਲੀਵੇਸ਼ਨਾਂ ਲਈ ਵਰਤੋ।
- Export elevations as DWG/DXF and 3D as GLTFExport an elevation as DWG, DXF or DXB at a chosen Acad version, and export 3D views as GLTF with KHR extensions.
- ਐਕਸਪਲੋਡਿਡ ਵਿਊ ਆਉਟਪੁੱਟ PDF ਕਿਵੇਂ ਬਣਾਈ ਜਾਂਦੀ ਹੈਦੇਖੋ ਕਿ ਐਕਸਪਲੋਡਿਡ ਵਿਊ ਆਉਟਪੁੱਟ ਕੀ ਪੈਦਾ ਕਰਦੀ ਹੈ ਅਤੇ ਹਰ ਯੂਨਿਟ ਦਾ ਡਾਇਗ੍ਰਾਮ, ਲੇਬਲ ਅਤੇ ਪਾਰਟਸ ਚਾਰਟ ਕਿਵੇਂ ਲੇਆਉਟ ਕੀਤਾ ਜਾਂਦਾ ਹੈ।
- Export 3D ਮਾਡਲ ਨੂੰ glTF ਵਜੋਂ ਬਣਾਓ, ਫਿਰ sk ਫਾਰਮੈਟ ਵਿੱਚ ਬਦਲੋ3D ਮਾਡਲ ਨੂੰ glTF ਵਿੱਚ ਐਕਸਪੋਰਟ ਕਰਕੇ, ਇਸਨੂੰ sk ਫਾਰਮੈਟ ਵਿੱਚ ਬਦਲ ਕੇ, ਅਤੇ ਆਪਣੀ ਟਾਰਗਿਟ ਐਪਲੀਕੇਸ਼ਨ ਵਿੱਚ ਇੰਪੋਰਟ ਕਰਕੇ ਪਲੇਟਫਾਰਮ ਤੋਂ ਬਾਹਰ ਲੈ ਜਾਓ।
- ਐਡਮਿਨ ਪਸੰਦਾਂ ਤੋਂ ਬਲੌਕ ਕੀਤੀਆਂ ਆਉਟਪੁੱਟ ਡਾਊਨਲੋਡਾਂ ਨੂੰ ਠੀਕ ਕਰੋਤਿੰਨ ਐਡਮਿਨ ਪਸੰਦਾਂ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨਰਾਂ ਨੂੰ ਆਉਟਪੁੱਟ ਡਾਊਨਲੋਡ ਕਰਨ ਤੋਂ ਰੋਕ ਸਕਦੀਆਂ ਹਨ, ਅਤੇ ਜਦੋਂ ਉਲੰਘਣਾਵਾਂ ਕਾਰਨ ਹੋਣ ਤਾਂ ਐਡਮਿਨ ਪ੍ਰਤੀ-ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ-ਬ੍ਰਾਂਚ ਛੋਟ ਦੇ ਸਕਦਾ ਹੈ।
- Reassign modular units to renumber cabinet elevationsRenumber cabinet elevations by reassigning modular units in output settings, shifting the sequence so labels run in order.
- Outputs settings ਵਿੱਚ ਯੂਨਿਟ ਅਤੇ ਪੈਨਲ ਐਨੋਟੇਸ਼ਨ ਮੁੜ-ਨਿਰਧਾਰਿਤ ਕਰੋਦੋ ਵਿੱਚੋਂ ਇੱਕ ਮੋਡ ਵਰਤ ਕੇ ਆਪਣੇ ਆਉਟਪੁੱਟਾਂ ਵਿੱਚ ਯੂਨਿਟ ਅਤੇ ਪੈਨਲ ਲੇਬਲਾਂ ਨੂੰ ਮੁੜ-ਨੰਬਰ ਦਿਓ; ਪਹਿਲਾਂ ਪੁਸ਼ਟੀ ਕਰੋ ਕਿਉਂਕਿ ਬਦਲਾਅ ਨੂੰ ਵਾਪਸ ਨਹੀਂ ਕੀਤਾ ਜਾ ਸਕਦਾ।
- Remove software-generated operations in panel 2D CAMLearn why some operations in panel 2D CAM cannot be deleted directly and how to remove them by reverting the shape.
- ਰੈਂਡਰਾਂ ਅਤੇ ਉਤਪਾਦਨ ਆਉਟਪੁੱਟਾਂ ਵਿੱਚ ਲੈਵਲ ਸਕੋਪ ਨੂੰ ਸਮਝੋਜਾਣੋ ਕਿ ਰੈਂਡਰ ਉਸ ਲੈਵਲ ਸਕੋਪ ਦਾ ਕਿਵੇਂ ਸਤਿਕਾਰ ਕਰਦੇ ਹਨ ਜਿਸ ਤੋਂ ਤੁਸੀਂ ਉਹਨਾਂ ਨੂੰ ਚਲਾਉਂਦੇ ਹੋ, ਜਦੋਂ ਕਿ ਉਤਪਾਦਨ ਆਉਟਪੁੱਟ ਹਮੇਸ਼ਾ ਪੂਰੇ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਨੂੰ ਕਵਰ ਕਰਦੇ ਹਨ।
- ਸ਼ਡਿਊਲ, ਕੰਪੋਜ਼ਿਟ BOQ ਅਤੇ ਸ਼ਡਿਊਲ ਟੈਂਪਲੇਟ ਨੂੰ ਸਮਝੋਜਾਣੋ ਕਿ ਸ਼ਡਿਊਲ-ਅਧਾਰਿਤ ਆਉਟਪੁੱਟ ਲੁਕੇ ਹੋਏ ਅਤੇ workscope ਤੋਂ ਬਾਹਰ ਕੀਤੇ ਤੱਤਾਂ ਨਾਲ ਕਿਵੇਂ ਵਿਵਹਾਰ ਕਰਦੇ ਹਨ, ਕੈਬਿਨੇਟ ਕੰਪੋਜ਼ਿਟ BOQ ਕਿਵੇਂ ਪ੍ਰਿੰਟ ਹੁੰਦਾ ਹੈ, ਅਤੇ ਸ਼ਡਿਊਲ ਨੂੰ ਕਿਵੇਂ ਸੰਭਾਲਣਾ ਅਤੇ ਐਕਸਪੋਰਟ ਕਰਨਾ ਹੈ।
ਕੀਮਤ ਅਤੇ ਕੋਟੇਸ਼ਨ5
- Choose a pricing quotation layout templatePick the template that groups and orders the rows of the printed quote the way you want.
- ਵਸਤੂਆਂ ਦੀਆਂ ਕੀਮਤਾਂ ਵਿੱਚ ਵੰਡੇ ਹੋਏ ਖਰਚੇ ਕਿਵੇਂ ਸ਼ਾਮਲ ਕੀਤੇ ਜਾਂਦੇ ਹਨਜਾਣੋ ਕਿ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ-ਪੱਧਰ ਦੇ ਵੰਡੇ ਹੋਏ ਖਰਚੇ ਕੋਟੇਸ਼ਨ ਵਸਤੂਆਂ ਵਿੱਚ ਕਿਵੇਂ ਫੈਲਾਏ ਜਾਂਦੇ ਹਨ ਅਤੇ ਫਿਰ ਪ੍ਰਤੀ-ਯੂਨਿਟ ਕੀਮਤਾਂ ਕੈਟਾਲਾਗ ਕੀਮਤਾਂ ਨਾਲੋਂ ਵੱਧ ਕਿਉਂ ਦਿਖਾਈ ਦਿੰਦੀਆਂ ਹਨ।
- How quotation discounts are calculatedLearn how discounts on a quotation are configured per item type and applied successively after SKU-level discounts are reserved.
- How quotation row overrides apply across a designLearn which quotation row changes apply to every row of the same SKU and which stay per design item.
- How per-set SKU quantities are rounded in schedulesUnderstand why per-set hardware quantities round up once at the design level while per-cabinet listings show consumed base quantities.
ਪਸੰਦਾਂ, ਸਹਿਯੋਗ ਅਤੇ ਐਡਮਿਨ28
- Lock a design and unlock it as a project managerLock a design so no changes can be made until a project manager unlocks it, either from the admin portal or after a request.
- What locking a design blocks and what it still allowsLocking a design stops changes from being saved while anyone with access can still open, view and generate cut lists and board layouts from it.
- ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਨੂੰ ਮਨਜ਼ੂਰ ਕਰੋ, ਲਾਕ ਕਰੋ ਅਤੇ ਅਣਲਾਕ ਕਰੋਸੌਫਟਵੇਅਰ ਦੇ ਕੰਟਰੋਲਾਂ ਦੀ ਵਰਤੋਂ ਕਰਕੇ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਨੂੰ ਮਨਜ਼ੂਰ ਕਰੋ, ਅੱਗੇ ਸੋਧਾਂ ਤੋਂ ਬਚਾਓ, ਅਤੇ ਜਦੋਂ ਬਦਲਾਅ ਲੋੜੀਂਦੇ ਹੋਣ ਤਾਂ ਇਸਨੂੰ ਦੁਬਾਰਾ ਅਣਲਾਕ ਕਰੋ।
- How cloud designs save and stay visible to the adminLearn how cloud-based designs save automatically, who can see them, and how to clone one within a project.
- Fix a reconnecting popup and avoid losing unsaved changesWhen the reconnecting popup appears, reloading warns that some changes may not be saved and loses anything made after the connection became unstable.
- Undo a change without removing connectorsUse undo after a change to return the design to its previous state.
ਸਭ ਵੇਖੋ (28)
- ਸਹਿ-ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨਿੰਗ: ਸਹਿਯੋਗੀ ਵੱਲੋਂ ਸੇਵ ਕਰਨ 'ਤੇ ਸੇਵ ਨਾ ਕੀਤੀਆਂ ਤਬਦੀਲੀਆਂ ਗੁੰਮ ਹੋ ਜਾਂਦੀਆਂ ਹਨਜਾਣੋ ਕਿ ਸਹਿ-ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨਿੰਗ ਦੌਰਾਨ ਸਹਿਯੋਗੀ ਵੱਲੋਂ ਸੇਵ ਕਰਨ 'ਤੇ ਤੁਹਾਡੀਆਂ ਸੇਵ ਨਾ ਕੀਤੀਆਂ ਤਬਦੀਲੀਆਂ ਦਾ ਕੀ ਹੁੰਦਾ ਹੈ, ਅਤੇ ਕੰਮ ਗੁੰਮ ਹੋਣ ਤੋਂ ਕਿਵੇਂ ਬਚਣਾ ਹੈ।
- Control whether designers see construction optionsFind out what decides whether a designer can see construction-related options such as changing construction or item parameters.
- ਐਡਮਿਨ ਪੋਰਟਲ ਤੋਂ ਆਪਣੇ ਆਪ ਨੂੰ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨਰ ਦੇ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਤੱਕ ਪਹੁੰਚ ਦਿਓਐਡਮਿਨ ਪੋਰਟਲ ਦੇ Design Hub ਦੀ ਵਰਤੋਂ ਕਰਕੇ, ਉਸ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਤੱਕ ਆਪਣੇ ਆਪ ਨੂੰ ਪਹੁੰਚ ਦਿਓ ਜੋ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨਰ ਨੇ ਹੱਥੋਂ ਸਾਂਝਾ ਨਹੀਂ ਕੀਤਾ।
- Hide unedited LHS and RHS fillers instead of deleting themHide left-hand-side and right-hand-side fillers that have not been edited directly in the design rather than deleting them.
- Keep offline design changes by leaving the design space openKeep the design space open until the connection returns so your pending changes are saved.
- Refresh cache and replace cabinets after SKU structure changesAfter changing the SKU structure in the catalogue, refresh the cache and replace the cabinets in the design portal so the SKUs reflect the admin change.
- Activate or deactivate an automation ruleSet a rule's Rule Activation to True or False to control whether it is applied to the design when rules run.
- ਐਡਮਿਨ ਪੋਰਟਲ ਬਲਕ ਕਾਰਵਾਈਆਂ ਰਾਹੀਂ ਡ੍ਰਾਅਰ ਬੋਤਮ ਪੈਨਲ ਆਫਸੈੱਟ ਬਦਲੋਬਲਕ ਕਾਰਵਾਈਆਂ ਅਤੇ ਪੈਨਲ-ਪੱਧਰੀ ਸੋਧਾਂ ਦੀ ਵਰਤੋਂ ਕਰਕੇ ਐਡਮਿਨ ਪੋਰਟਲ ਰਾਹੀਂ ਡ੍ਰਾਅਰ ਬੋਤਮ ਪੈਨਲ ਆਫਸੈੱਟ ਸੈੱਟ ਕਰੋ, ਅਤੇ ਸਮੱਗਰੀ ਦੇ ਅਨੁਕੂਲ ਮੋਟਾਈ ਚੁਣੋ।
- Feature flags cannot be scoped to shutters onlyFeature flags can be enabled, disabled, or disabled for designers, but they apply to a whole feature area rather than a single part such as shutters.
- Find and set size limits on catalogue modelsOpen a hardware catalogue item to see the exact limits enforced and set the allowed range designers can use.
- Find the lock warning alert for a locked designLearn where the warning that changes to a locked design will not be saved appears on screen.
- Fix SKU structure rules in a design with bulk editMake the SKUs or cabinets in a design follow the SKU structure rules by selecting all and running the bulk edit SKU structure action.
- ਜਦੋਂ ਸੇਵਿੰਗ ਅਧੂਰੀ ਹੋਵੇ ਤਾਂ reload, back ਅਤੇ forward ਨੂੰ ਕਿਵੇਂ ਸੁਰੱਖਿਅਤ ਰੱਖਿਆ ਜਾਂਦਾ ਹੈਜਾਣੋ ਕਿ ਪਲੇਟਫਾਰਮ ਸੇਵ ਹੋ ਰਹੀ ਹੋਣ ਵੇਲੇ reload, back ਜਾਂ forward ਤੋਂ ਪਹਿਲਾਂ ਤੁਹਾਨੂੰ ਕਿਵੇਂ ਚੇਤਾਵਨੀ ਦਿੰਦਾ ਹੈ, ਅਤੇ reload ਕਦੇ ਵੀ ਤੁਹਾਡੇ 'ਤੇ ਜ਼ਬਰਦਸਤੀ ਕਿਉਂ ਨਹੀਂ ਕੀਤਾ ਜਾਂਦਾ।
- ਰੀਲੋਡਾਂ ਵਿੱਚ ਨੈਵਬਾਰ ਵਿੱਚ ਕਮਰਾ ਚੁਣਿਆ ਰੱਖੋਜਾਣੋ ਕਿ ਨੈਵਬਾਰ ਦੀ ਕਮਰੇ ਦੀ ਚੋਣ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਨਾਲ ਕਿਵੇਂ ਸੰਭਾਲੀ ਜਾਂਦੀ ਹੈ ਅਤੇ ਇਸਨੂੰ ਕਿਵੇਂ ਸਾਫ਼ ਕਰਨਾ ਜਾਂ ਸੁਰੱਖਿਅਤ ਢੰਗ ਨਾਲ ਰੀਲੋਡ ਕਰਨਾ ਹੈ।
- ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨਰ ਵਜੋਂ ਪੂਰਵ-ਝਲਕ ਵੇਖੋ ਤਾਂ ਜੋ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨਰ ਦੇ ਨਜ਼ਰੀਏ ਤੋਂ ਸੰਰਚਨਾ ਦੀ ਪੁਸ਼ਟੀ ਕੀਤੀ ਜਾ ਸਕੇਟੀਮ ਲਈ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਪੈਰਾਮੀਟਰ ਸੰਰਚਿਤ ਕਰਦੇ ਸਮੇਂ 'preview as designer' ਵਿਕਲਪ ਵਰਤੋ ਤਾਂ ਜੋ ਤੁਸੀਂ ਵੇਖ ਸਕੋ ਕਿ ਸੰਰਚਨਾ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨਰ ਨੂੰ ਕਿਵੇਂ ਦਿਸਦੀ ਹੈ।
- Recover lost active sales channel via PreferencesRecover the active sales channel for a design that shows it has been lost by selecting the correct channel in Preferences.
- ਸਿਸਟਮ ਅੱਪਡੇਟਾਂ ਤੋਂ ਬਾਅਦ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਕੈਸ਼ ਤਾਜ਼ਾ ਕਰੋਸਿਸਟਮ ਅੱਪਡੇਟਾਂ ਤੋਂ ਬਾਅਦ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਕੈਸ਼ ਤਾਜ਼ਾ ਕਰੋ ਤਾਂ ਜੋ ਨਵੀਨਤਮ ਸੈਟਿੰਗਾਂ ਅਤੇ ਬਦਲਾਅ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਵਾਤਾਵਰਣ ਵਿੱਚ ਸਹੀ ਢੰਗ ਨਾਲ ਦਿਖਾਈ ਦੇਣ।
- ਕਿਸੇ ਵਰਜਨ ਨੂੰ ਸਿਰਫ਼ ਤਦ ਹੀ ਬਹਾਲ ਕਰੋ ਜਦੋਂ ਬਾਅਦ ਦਾ ਕੰਮ ਲੋੜੀਂਦਾ ਨਾ ਹੋਵੇਕਿਸੇ ਪਹਿਲਾਂ ਵਾਲੇ ਵਰਜਨ ਨੂੰ ਸਿਰਫ਼ ਤਦ ਹੀ ਬਹਾਲ ਕਰੋ ਜਦੋਂ ਤੁਹਾਨੂੰ ਉਸ ਤੋਂ ਬਾਅਦ ਕੀਤਾ ਕੰਮ ਹੁਣ ਲੋੜੀਂਦਾ ਨਾ ਹੋਵੇ, ਜਾਂ ਪਹਿਲਾਂ ਮੌਜੂਦਾ ਸਥਿਤੀ ਨੂੰ ਇੱਕ ਵਰਜਨ ਵਜੋਂ ਸੰਭਾਲ ਲਓ।
- See which catalogue items are hidden and whyFind out how the carousel filters items by size and read the exact limit and your current dimension for each hidden item.
- Use bulk editing to apply changes across a whole categoryApply a change to an entire category at once instead of editing units one by one.
- Use ready-made internal configuration options for client discussionsUse ready-made internal configuration options to hold quick design discussions with a client.
- Why handles are hidden in the catalog pickerLearn why handle, gola and profile-handle items disappear from the picker for a shutter and where to find them.
ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਵਰਕਸਪੇਸ ਦੀ ਸਮੱਸਿਆ ਹੱਲ ਕਰਨਾ19
- ਡਰਾਇਰ ਦੀ ਉਚਾਈ ਠੀਕ ਕਰਨ ਲਈ ਪੈਨਲ ਅਤੇ ਡਰਾਇਰ ਨਿਰਮਾਣ ਆਫਸੈੱਟ ਜ਼ੀਰੋ ਕਰੋਡਰਾਇਰ ਦੀ ਉਚਾਈ ਦਾ ਮੁੱਲ ਜਾਂਚ ਕੇ ਅਤੇ ਇਸ ਨੂੰ ਪ੍ਰਭਾਵਿਤ ਕਰਨ ਵਾਲੇ ਪੈਨਲ ਅਤੇ ਹੇਠਲੇ ਆਫਸੈੱਟ ਜ਼ੀਰੋ ਕਰਕੇ, ਗਲਤ ਉਚਾਈ ਜਾਂ ਫਿੱਟ ਵਾਲਾ ਡਰਾਇਰ ਠੀਕ ਕਰੋ।
- Make drawers in a set share the same heightSwitch off Fixed Height on each drawer so the system sizes them equally, and fix shelves above drawers.
- Fix a drawer that protrudes past the back panelCorrect a drawer sticking out past the back panel by choosing a channel whose depth matches the usable cabinet depth.
- Fix a drawer that crosses the cabinet frontCheck the Drawer Back Gap on an external drawer so the drawer stops crossing the cabinet front.
- SketchUp ਤੋਂ ਆਯਾਤ ਕੀਤੇ ਸ਼ਟਰਾਂ ਲਈ ਉਤਪਾਦਨ ਵੇਰਵੇ ਪ੍ਰਾਪਤ ਕਰੋSketchUp (.skp) ਫਾਈਲ ਅੱਪਲੋਡ ਕਰਕੇ ਸ਼ਟਰ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ Infurnia ਵਿੱਚ ਲਿਆਏ ਜਾ ਸਕਦੇ ਹਨ, ਪਰ ਆਯਾਤ ਕੀਤੇ ਸ਼ਟਰ ਉਤਪਾਦਨ ਵੇਰਵੇ ਨਹੀਂ ਬਣਾਉਂਦੇ।
- ਕੈਨਵਸ ਉੱਤੇ ਉੱਪਰਲੀ ਸਥਿਤੀ ਬਾਰ ਦੇ ਬੈਨਰ ਪੜ੍ਹੋਜਾਣੋ ਕਿ ਕੈਨਵਸ ਦੇ ਉੱਪਰ ਹਰ ਬੈਨਰ ਦਾ ਕੀ ਅਰਥ ਹੈ ਅਤੇ ਇਹ ਜਿਸ ਸਥਿਤੀ ਦੀ ਰਿਪੋਰਟ ਕਰਦਾ ਹੈ, ਉਸ ਨੂੰ ਕਿਵੇਂ ਸਾਫ਼ ਕਰਨਾ ਹੈ।
ਸਭ ਵੇਖੋ (19)
- Fix a disabled wall tool when drawing wallsSwitch to the floor level and 2D floor plan so the wall tool becomes available again.
- Set laminate grain direction manuallySet or correct the grain direction of a laminate manually with the manual edit option.
- 3D ਮੋਡ ਵਿੱਚ ਟੂਲ ਸਲੇਟੀ ਕਿਉਂ ਦਿਖਾਈ ਦਿੰਦੇ ਹਨਜਾਣੋ ਕਿ 3D ਮੋਡ ਵਿੱਚ ਜਾਣ 'ਤੇ ਕੁਝ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਟੂਲਬਾਰ ਟੂਲ ਸਲੇਟੀ ਕਿਉਂ ਦਿਖਾਈ ਦਿੰਦੇ ਹਨ।
- Find the What's New entry in the property panelScroll up in the property panel box on the left to reveal the blue What's New entry, which sits in the same panel as viewport navigation, global preferences and settings.
- ਉਹ 3D ਸੀਨ ਠੀਕ ਕਰੋ ਜੋ ਲੋਡ ਨਹੀਂ ਹੁੰਦਾਜੇ 3D ਸੀਨ ਲੋਡ ਨਹੀਂ ਹੁੰਦਾ ਅਤੇ ਇੱਕ ਗਲਤੀ WebGL 2.0 ਅਤੇ GPU ਹਾਰਡਵੇਅਰ ਐਕਸਲੇਰੇਸ਼ਨ ਮੰਗਦੀ ਹੈ, ਤਾਂ ਤੁਹਾਡਾ ਬ੍ਰਾਊਜ਼ਰ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਨੂੰ ਰੈਂਡਰ ਨਹੀਂ ਕਰ ਸਕਦਾ।
- Fix a panel's internal finish that will not changeWhen a panel's internal finish will not change in any output, an automation rule may be overriding it.
- Move internal drawers back and shorten fillers in a drawer systemSet Drawer Offset(from front) to push an internal drawer set's boxes and fascias back, and Fillers Depth Reduction to shorten the fillers from the front.
- Set X offset to zero at filler panel levelSet the X offset to zero when working at the filler panel level so the placement is correct.
- ਬਣਾਏ ਗਏ ਪ੍ਰੋਫਾਈਲ ਦੀ ਦਿਸ਼ਾ ਸਹੀ ਕਰਨ ਲਈ ਪ੍ਰੋਫਾਈਲ ਓਰੀਐਂਟੇਸ਼ਨ ਟੌਗਲ ਕਰੋਟਾਈਲਿੰਗ ਅਤੇ ਕਟਿੰਗ ਟੂਲ ਵਿੱਚ ਕੰਧ ਅਤੇ ਉੱਪਰਲੀ ਸ਼ਕਲ ਚੁਣੋ, ਫਿਰ ਗਲਤ ਦਿਸ਼ਾ ਵੱਲ ਮੂੰਹ ਕਰਦੇ ਬਣਾਏ ਗਏ ਪ੍ਰੋਫਾਈਲ ਨੂੰ ਫਲਿਪ ਕਰੋ।
- Understand cabinet boundary box colours when snappingLearn what a red boundary box means while you place cabinets.
- Understand why filler cabinets show a carcass box in floorplanLearn why a filler cabinet appears as a box in plan and what that box's size reflects.
- Why Flip Sides is greyed out on a two-way doorLearn why Flip Sides cannot be used on a door whose 'Enable 2-way opening' is ticked, while Flip Hinge stays available.
- Why keyboard shortcuts stop responding in the canvasLearn which states intentionally ignore canvas keyboard shortcuts so you know when to wait instead of retrying.